Brother STAR 140E User`s guide

PANTONE2728
®
User’s Guide
Safety and Legal
Basic User’s Guide
Advanced User’s Guide
Safety and Legal
1
MFC-J6510DW/J6710DW
Using the
documentation
WARNING
1
WARNING indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injuries.
Please read this booklet before attempting to
operate the machine, or before attempting
any maintenance. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in an increased risk of
personal injury or damage to property,
including through fire, electrical shock, burns
or suffocation.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injuries.
Read all of the instructions. Save them for
later reference.
Symbols and conventions
used in the documentation
The following symbols and conventions are
used throughout the documentation.
Bold
Bold typeface identifies specific
keys on the machine’s control
panel, on the computer screen.
Italics
Italicized typeface emphasizes
an important point or refers you
to a related topic.
Courier
New
Text in Courier New font
identifies messages on the
LCD of the machine.
IMPORTANT
1
IMPORTANT indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
may result in damage to property or loss of
product functionality.
Notes tell you how you should
respond to a situation that may arise
or give tips about how the operation
works with other features.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to
possible electrical shock.
Improper Setup icons alert you to
devices and operations that are not
compatible with the machine.
Fire Hazard icons alert you to the
possibility of fire.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked
on the machine.
Note
The illustrations in this guide show the
MFC-J6710DW.
Version 0
USA/CAN
1
Compilation and Publication
1
Under the supervision of Brother Industries, Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published,
covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without
notice.
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials
contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused
by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors
relating to the publication.
Choosing a location
Put your machine on a flat, level, stable surface that is free of vibration and shocks, such as a
desk. Put the machine near a telephone wall jack and a standard AC power outlet. Choose a
location where the temperature remains between 50°F and 95°F (10°C and 35°C) and the
humidity is between 20% to 80% (without condensation).
WARNING
DO NOT expose the machine to direct sunlight, excessive heat, open flames, salty or corrosive
gasses, moisture or dust. DO NOT place your machine on a carpet or rug, as this will expose it
to dust. Doing so may create a risk of an electrical short or fire. It may also damage the machine
and/or render it inoperable.
DO NOT place the machine near heaters, air conditioners, electrical fan, refrigerators, or water.
Doing so may create the risk of a short circuit or fire should water come into contact with the
machine (including condensation caused by heating/air conditioning/ventilation equipment).
2
1
DO NOT place the machine near chemicals. Should the chemicals come into contact with the
machine, there may be a risk of fire. The chemicals may also cause the machine to malfunction
or become discolored.
Plastic bags are used in the packing of your machine. Plastic bags are not toys. To avoid the
danger of suffocation, keep these bags away from babies and children and dispose of them
properly.
CAUTION
Avoid placing your machine in a high-traffic area. If you must place it in a high-traffic area,
ensure that the machine is in a safe location where it cannot be accidentally knocked-over,
which could cause injury to you and serious damage to the machine.
Ensure that cables and cords leading to the machine are secured so as not to pose a tripping
hazard.
DO NOT place this machine on an unstable or tilted cart, stand, or table. The machine is heavy
and may fall, causing injury to you and serious damage to the machine.
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT place your machine next to sources of interference, such as speakers or the base
units of non Brother cordless telephones. Doing so may interfere with the operation of the
machine's electronic components.
• DO NOT place the machine on any tilted/slanted surface. DO NOT tip the machine after the
ink cartridges are installed. Doing so may cause ink spillage and internal damage to the
machine.
• DO NOT connect your machine to an AC power outlet controlled by wall switches or automatic
timers. Disruption of power can delete information from the machine's memory, and repeated
cycling of the power can damage the machine.
3
To use the machine safely
WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARDS
Failure to follow the warnings in this section may create the risk of an electrical shock. In
addition, you could create an electrical short, which may create the risk of a fire.
There are high-voltage electrodes inside the machine. Before you access the inside of the
machine, including for routine maintenance such as cleaning, make sure you have unplugged
the power cord from the AC power outlet, as well as any telephone (RJ-11) or Ethernet (RJ-45)
cables from the machine.
DO NOT push objects of any kind into this machine through slots or openings in the cabinet, as
they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts.
DO NOT handle the plug with wet hands.
Always make sure the plug is fully inserted.
DO NOT use the machine or handle the cord if the cord has become worn or frayed. If
unplugging your machine, DO NOT touch the damaged/frayed part.
DO NOT continue using the machine if it has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
Instead, unplug the machine from the power outlet and contact Brother Authorized Service
Personnel.
4
1
If water, other liquids, or metal objects get inside the machine, immediately unplug the machine
from the AC power outlet and contact Brother Authorized Service Personnel.
DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure what kind of power
source you have, contact a qualified electrician.
Power Cord Safety:
• DO NOT pull on the middle of the AC power cord; pulling on the middle may cause the cord
to separate from the plug. Doing this might cause an electrical shock.
• DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord.
• DO NOT place this machine where people can walk on the cord.
• DO NOT place this machine in a position where the cord is stretched or strain is otherwise
put on the cord, as it may become worn or fray.
• If an extension cord is used with this machine, make sure that the total ampere ratings on
the machines plugged into the extension cord DO NOT exceed the extension cord ampere
rating. Also, make sure that the total of all machines plugged into the AC power outlet does
not exceed 15 amperes (USA only).
Never touch telephone wires or terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has
been unplugged at the wall jack. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never
install a telephone wall jack in a wet location.
FIRE HAZARDS
Failure to follow the warnings in this section may create the risk of a fire.
DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray or an organic solvent/liquid that contains
alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the machine. Doing this may also cause an
electrical shock.
DO NOT use this product in the vicinity of combustible dust.
5
CAUTION
DO NOT sit or stand on the machine or use it for any purpose beyond its intended purpose.
If the machine becomes hot, releases smoke, or generates any strong smells, immediately
unplug the machine from the AC power outlet. Call Brother Customer Service.
Wait until pages have exited the machine before picking them up. Doing this may cause injury
to your fingers by trapping them in a roller.
DO NOT put your hands on the edge of the machine. Doing this may cause injury to your fingers
by pinching them.
6
DO NOT touch the area shaded in the illustration. Doing this may cause injury to your fingers by
cutting them on the edge of the machine.
DO NOT carry the machine by holding the scanner cover or the Jam Clear Cover. Doing this
may cause the machine to slip out of your hands. Only carry the machine by placing your hands
under the entire machine.
(MFC-J6510DW)
1
(MFC-J6710DW)
To prevent injuries when moving or lifting this machine, make sure to use at least two people.
Be careful not to pinch your fingers when you set the machine back down.
7
IMPORTANT
• Disruption of power can wipe out information in the machine's memory.
• DO NOT put objects on top of the machine.
• DO NOT place anything in front of the machine that will block received faxes. DO NOT place
anything in the path of received faxes.
• If the machine does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed, adjust
only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other
controls may result in damage or minor exposure to electromagnetic waves and will often
require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the machine to normal operation.
• A distinct change in the machine’s performance may, indicate a need for service.
• The power cord, including extensions, should be no longer than 16.5 feet (5 meters).
DO NOT connect your machine to an AC power outlet on the same circuit as large appliances
or other equipment that requires a significant amount of electricity to operate. Doing this may
cause an overvoltage, tripping your circuit breaker or blowing your fuse. If you cannot avoid
using the machine with these appliances, we recommend that you use a voltage transformer
or a high-frequency noise filter. Use a voltage regulator if the power source is not stable.
• Lightning and power surges can damage this machine. We recommend that you use a quality
surge protection device on the AC power line and any telephone (RJ-11) or Ethernet (RJ-45)
cable plugged into the machine, or that you unplug the cords during a lightning storm.
Important safety instructions
1 DO NOT attempt to service this machine yourself because opening or removing covers may
expose you to dangerous voltage points and other risks and may void your warranty. Refer all
servicing to a Brother Authorized Service Center. For the location of your nearest Brother
Authorized Service Center, please call:
In USA: 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER
2 Unplug this machine from the power outlet and refer all servicing to Brother Authorized Service
Personnel under the following conditions:
 When the power cord is damaged or frayed.
 If liquid has been spilled into the machine.
 If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.
8
1
Regulation
1
WARNING
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock and injury to people, including the following:
• DO NOT use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink
or washing machine, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric
shock from lightning.
• DO NOT use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock and injury to people;
• Use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
This product must be installed near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In case of an
emergency, you must unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet to shut off the power
completely.
Standard telephone and FCC notices
1
These notices are in effect on models sold and used in the United States only.
When programming emergency numbers or making test calls to emergency numbers:
 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging
up.
 Perform these activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the
ACTA. On the backside of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided
to the telephone company.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone line by means of a standard modular jack,
USOC RJ11C.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network
must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA.
A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be
connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for
details.
9
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be
certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs,
contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this
product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits
represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 06 is a REN of 0.6). For earlier
products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn't
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures
that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide
advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact
Brother Customer Service. (See Brother numbers in the Basic User’s Guide.) If the equipment is
causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect
the equipment until the problem is resolved.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about
what will disable alarm equipment, call your telephone company or a qualified installer.
If you are not able to solve a problem with your machine, call Brother Customer Service.
(See Brother numbers in the Basic User’s Guide.)
WARNING
For protection against the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect all cables from the wall
outlet before servicing, modifying or installing the equipment.
IMPORTANT
• This equipment may not be used on coin service lines provided by the telephone company or
connected to party lines.
• Brother cannot accept any financial or other responsibilities that may be the result of your use
of this information, including direct, special or consequential damages. There are no
warranties extended or granted by this document.
• This machine has been certified to comply with FCC standards, which are applied to the USA
only.
10
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of
Conformity (USA only)
Responsible Party:
1
Brother International Corporation
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
TEL: (908) 704-1700
declares, that the products
Product Name: MFC-J6510DW and MFC-J6710DW
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
 Call the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
 This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
IMPORTANT
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• A shielded interface cable should be used to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B
digital device.
11
Industry Canada Compliance Statement (Canada only)
1
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES–003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB–003 du Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
L'utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l'utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le
fonctionnement du dispositif.
EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS (Canada only)
1
NOTICE
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
Le présent materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d’Industrie Canada.
NOTICE
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to
be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices
does not exceed five.
L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui
peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut
consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme
d’indices d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.
For use in the USA or Canada only
1
These machines are made for use in the USA and Canada only. We cannot recommend using
them overseas because it may violate the Telecommunications Regulations of that country and
the power requirements of your machine may not be compatible with the power available in foreign
countries. Using USA or Canada models overseas is at your own risk and may void your warranty.
LAN connection
IMPORTANT
DO NOT connect this product to a LAN connection that is subject to over-voltages.
12
1
International ENERGY STAR® Qualification Statement
1
The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR® Program is to promote the development and
popularization of energy-efficient equipment.
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has determined that this product meets
the ENERGY STAR® specifications for energy efficiency.
13
Trademarks
The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries.
Apple, Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and
other countries.
Adobe, Flash, Illustrator and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Nuance, the Nuance logo, PaperPort and ScanSoft are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
PowerPC is a registered trademarks of IBM in the United States and/or other countries.
Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO, Memory Stick PRO Duo, Memory Stick Duo, MagicGate,
MagicGate Memory Stick, Memory Stick Micro and M2 are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
AOSS is a trademark of Buffalo Inc.
WPA, WPA2, Wi-Fi Protected Access and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are either trademarks or
registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance in the United States and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Alliance are registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Intel and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
FaceFilter Studio is a trademark of Reallusion, Inc.
BRAdmin Professional is a trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.
CorelDraw, Corel Paint Shop Pro and Corel WordPerfect are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Corel Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in Canada, the United States and/or other countries.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License
Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.
Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related
documents and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those
respective companies.
14
1
Open Source Licensing Remarks
1
This product includes open-source software.
Please see Open Source Licensing Remarks and Copyright information on the supplied CD-ROM.
(For Windows®) “X:\\License.txt” (where X is your drive letter).
(For Macintosh) Double-click the CD-ROM icon on your desktop. Then double-click the Utilities
icon. License.rtf will appear.
Legal limitations for copying
1
Color reproductions of certain documents are illegal and may result in either criminal or civil
liability. The listing below is intended to be a guide rather than a complete listing of every possible
prohibition. In case of doubt, we suggest that you consult with the appropriate authority or advisor
with regard to the specific document.
The following documents issued by the United States/Canadian Government or any of its
Agencies, States, Territories or Provinces may not be copied:
 Money
 Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
 Certificates of Deposit
 Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
 Selective Service or draft papers
 Passports
 United States/Canadian Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
 Food Stamps
 Immigration Papers
 Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies
 Identifying badges or insignias
 Licenses and Certificates of Title to motor vehicles, under certain State/Provincial law
Coping copyrighted works may be regulated by Federal, State of local laws. For more information,
consult an appropriate authority or advisor.
Works of art should be considered the equivalent of copyrighted works.
15
BASIC USER’S GUIDE
MFC-J6910DW
Version 0
USA/CAN
If you need to call Customer Service
Please complete the following information for future
reference:
Model Number: MFC-J6910DW
Serial Number: 1
Date of Purchase:
Place of Purchase:
1
The serial number is on the back of the unit. Retain
this User's Guide with your sales receipt as a
permanent record of your purchase, in the event of
theft, fire or warranty service.
Register your product on-line at
http://www.brother.com/registration/
By registering your product with Brother, you will be recorded as the
original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:
 may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product
should you lose your receipt;
 may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product loss
covered by insurance; and,
 will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special
offers.
The most convenient and efficient way to register your new product is
on-line at http://www.brother.com/registration/.
© 2010 Brother Industries, Ltd.
Brother numbers
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be
made from within that country.
Register your product
By registering your product with Brother International Corporation, you will be recorded as the
original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:
 may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product should you lose your receipt;
 may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product loss covered by insurance; and,
 will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special offers.
Please complete and fax the Brother Warranty Registration And Test Sheet or, for your
convenience and most efficient way to register your new product, register on-line at
http://www.brother.com/registration/
FAQs (frequently asked questions)
The Brother Solutions Center is our one-stop resource for all your Fax Machine/Multi-Function
Center needs. You can download the latest software documents and utilities, read FAQs and
troubleshooting tips, and learn how to get the most from your Brother product.
http://solutions.brother.com/
Note
• You can check here for Brother driver updates.
• To keep your machine performance up to date, check here for the latest firmware upgrade.
For Customer Service
In USA:
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
1-901-379-1215 (fax)
In Canada:
1-877-BROTHER
(514) 685-4898 (fax)
Service Center Locator (USA only)
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437).
Service Center Locations (Canada only)
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER.
i
Ordering accessories and supplies
For best quality results use only genuine Brother accessories, which are available at most Brother
retailers. If you cannot find the accessory you need and you have a Visa, MasterCard, Discover,
or American Express credit card, you can order accessories directly from Brother. (You can visit
us online for a complete selection of the Brother accessories and supplies that are available for
purchase.)
Note
In Canada only Visa and MasterCard are accepted.
In USA:
1-877-552-MALL (1-877-552-6255)
1-800-947-1445 (fax)
http://www.brothermall.com/
In Canada:
1-877-BROTHER
http://www.brother.ca/
Description
Item
Ink Cartridge Super High Yield <black>
LC79BK (Prints approx. 2,400 pages) 1
Ink Cartridge Super High Yield <yellow>
LC79Y (Prints approx. 1,200 pages) 1
Ink Cartridge Super High Yield <cyan> (blue)
LC79C (Prints approx. 1,200 pages) 1
Ink Cartridge Super High Yield <magenta> (red)
LC79M (Prints approx. 1,200 pages) 1
Ink Cartridge High Yield <black>
LC75BK (Prints approx. 600 pages) 1
Ink Cartridge High Yield <yellow>
LC75Y (Prints approx. 600 pages) 1
Ink Cartridge High Yield <cyan> (blue)
LC75C (Prints approx. 600 pages) 1
Ink Cartridge High Yield <magenta> (red)
LC75M (Prints approx. 600 pages) 1
Premium Plus Glossy Photo Paper
(Ledger size / 20 sheets)
BP71GLGR
(Letter size / 20 sheets)
BP71GLTR
(4"  6" size / 20 sheets)
BP71GP
Premium Glossy Photo Paper
(Letter size / 20 sheets)
BP61GLL (USA only)
(4"  6" / 20 sheets)
BP61GLP (USA only)
1
ii
For more information about the replacement consumables, visit us at http://www.brother.com/pageyield/.
Description
Item
Multipurpose Paper - Plain Paper
(Letter size / 500 sheets)
BP60MPLTR (USA only)
Matte Inkjet Paper
(Letter size / 25 sheets)
BP60ML (USA only)
Plain Inkjet Paper
(Ledger size / 100 sheets)
BP60PLGR (USA only)
(Letter size / 100 sheets)
BP60PL100 (USA only)
Telephone Line Cord
LG3077001 (USA only)
Basic User's Guide
LX7947001 (English for USA and Canada)
LX7947002 (French for Canada)
iii
Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties
(USA and Canada)
BROTHER'S LICENSOR(S), AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS
(COLLECTIVELY BROTHER'S LICENSOR) MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE SOFTWARE. BROTHER'S
LICENSOR(S) DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS
REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF
ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS OR OTHERWISE. THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS
ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT PERMITTED BY
SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN CANADA. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
IN NO EVENT WILL BROTHER'S LICENSOR(S) BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS
INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE EVEN IF BROTHER'S LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN
CANADA DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU. IN ANY EVENT BROTHER'S LICENSOR'S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL
DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT
LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.
iv
Compilation and Publication Notice
Under the supervision of Brother Industries, Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published,
covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without
notice.
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials
contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused
by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors
relating to the publication.
v
User's Guides and where do I find it?
Which manual?
What's in it?
Where is it?
Safety and Legal
Read this Guide first. Please read the Safety
Instructions before you set up your machine.
See this Guide for trademarks and legal
limitations.
Printed / In the box
Quick Setup Guide
Follow the instructions for setting up your
machine and installing the drivers and software
for the operating system and connection type
you are using.
Printed / In the box
Basic User's Guide
Learn the basic Fax, Copy, Scan and
PhotoCapture Center™ operations and how to
replace consumables. See troubleshooting tips.
Printed / In the box
Advanced User's Guide
Learn more advanced operations: Fax, Copy,
security features, printing reports and
performing routine maintenance.
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
Software User's Guide
Follow these instructions for Printing, Scanning,
Network Scanning, PhotoCapture Center™,
Remote Setup, PC-Fax, and using the Brother
ControlCenter utility.
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
Network Glossary
This Guide provides basic information about
advanced network features of Brother
machines along with explanations about
general networking and common terms.
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
Network User's Guide
This Guide provides useful information about
wired and wireless network settings and
security settings using the Brother machine.
You can also find supported protocol
information for your machine and detailed
troubleshooting tips.
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
vi
Table of Contents
(BASIC USER’S GUIDE)
1
General information
1
Using the documentation .......................................................................................1
Symbols and conventions used in the documentation ....................................1
Accessing the Advanced User’s Guide, Software User’s Guide,
Network User’s Guide, and Network Glossary ...................................................2
Viewing Documentation...................................................................................2
Accessing Brother Support (Windows®)................................................................4
Accessing Brother Support (Macintosh) ................................................................5
Control panel overview ..........................................................................................6
LCD Touchscreen............................................................................................8
Basic Operations .............................................................................................9
2
Loading paper
10
Loading paper and other print media...................................................................10
Loading paper in paper tray #1...................................................................... 10
Loading paper in paper tray #2...................................................................... 13
Loading paper in the manual feed slot ..........................................................17
Loading envelopes and postcards .................................................................19
Printable area ................................................................................................ 21
Paper settings......................................................................................................22
Paper Size and Type ..................................................................................... 22
Tray use in COPY mode................................................................................ 22
Tray use in FAX mode...................................................................................23
Secure Paper Feed mode for Ledger size Short Grain Paper.......................23
Acceptable paper and other print media.............................................................. 24
Recommended print media ........................................................................... 24
Handling and using print media ..................................................................... 25
Choosing the right print media....................................................................... 26
3
Loading documents
28
How to load documents ....................................................................................... 28
Using the ADF ...............................................................................................28
Using the scanner glass ................................................................................ 29
Unscannable area ......................................................................................... 30
4
Sending a fax
31
How to send a fax ................................................................................................ 31
Stop faxing..................................................................................................... 33
Setting scanner glass size for faxing ............................................................. 33
Color fax transmission ...................................................................................33
Canceling a fax in progress ........................................................................... 33
How to preview an outgoing fax .................................................................... 33
Transmission Verification Report...................................................................34
vii
5
Receiving a fax
35
Receive Modes ....................................................................................................35
Choose the correct Receive Mode ................................................................35
Using Receive Modes..........................................................................................37
Fax Only ........................................................................................................37
Fax/Tel...........................................................................................................37
Manual...........................................................................................................37
External TAD .................................................................................................37
Receive Mode settings ........................................................................................38
Ring Delay .....................................................................................................38
F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only) ...............................................................38
Easy Receive.................................................................................................39
Fax Preview (Black & White only)........................................................................39
How to preview a received fax.......................................................................39
Turning off Fax Preview.................................................................................41
6
Telephone services and external devices
42
Telephone services..............................................................................................42
Voice Mail ......................................................................................................42
Distinctive Ring..............................................................................................43
Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device)................................45
Connections...................................................................................................46
Recording an outgoing message (OGM) on an external TAD .......................46
Multi-line connections (PBX) .........................................................................46
External and extension telephones......................................................................47
Connecting an external or extension telephone ............................................47
Using external and extension telephones......................................................47
Using a non-Brother cordless external telephone .........................................48
Using remote codes.......................................................................................48
7
Dialing and storing numbers
49
How to dial ...........................................................................................................49
Manual dialing ...............................................................................................49
One Touch Dialing .........................................................................................49
Speed Dialing ................................................................................................49
Fax Redial .....................................................................................................50
Storing numbers ..................................................................................................50
Storing a pause .............................................................................................50
Storing One Touch Dial numbers ..................................................................50
Storing Speed Dial numbers..........................................................................51
Changing One Touch or Speed Dial names or numbers...............................52
8
Making copies
54
How to copy .........................................................................................................54
Stop copying..................................................................................................54
Copy settings.................................................................................................55
Paper Options................................................................................................55
viii
9
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or
USB Flash memory drive
57
PhotoCapture Center™ operations ..................................................................... 57
Using a memory card or USB Flash memory drive .......................................57
Getting started ..................................................................................................... 58
Print Images......................................................................................................... 60
View Photos................................................................................................... 60
PhotoCapture Center™ print settings.................................................................. 61
How to scan to a memory card or USB Flash memory drive............................... 61
10
How to print from a computer
63
Printing a document.............................................................................................63
11
How to scan to a computer
64
Scanning a document ..........................................................................................64
Scanning using the SCAN key............................................................................. 64
Scanning using a scanner driver ......................................................................... 64
A
Routine maintenance
65
Replacing the ink cartridges ................................................................................ 65
Cleaning and checking the machine.................................................................... 67
Cleaning the scanner..................................................................................... 67
Cleaning the print head .................................................................................68
Checking the print quality .............................................................................. 69
Checking the print alignment ......................................................................... 70
B
Troubleshooting
71
Error and Maintenance messages....................................................................... 71
Error animation .............................................................................................. 79
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal report ............................................... 79
Document jam .............................................................................................. 80
Printer jam or paper jam ................................................................................ 81
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 88
If you are having difficulty with your machine ................................................ 88
Dial Tone ......................................................................................................98
Telephone line interference / VoIP ................................................................ 98
Machine Information ............................................................................................ 99
Checking the serial number........................................................................... 99
Reset functions.............................................................................................. 99
How to reset the machine.............................................................................. 99
ix
C
Menu and features
100
On-screen programming....................................................................................100
Menu table .........................................................................................................101
Entering Text .....................................................................................................130
Inserting spaces .........................................................................................130
Making corrections ......................................................................................130
Repeating letters .........................................................................................130
D
Specifications
131
General ..............................................................................................................131
Print media.........................................................................................................133
Fax .....................................................................................................................135
Copy ..................................................................................................................136
PhotoCapture Center™ .....................................................................................137
PictBridge ..........................................................................................................138
Scanner .............................................................................................................139
Printer ................................................................................................................140
Interfaces ...........................................................................................................141
Computer requirements .....................................................................................142
Consumable items .............................................................................................143
Network (LAN) ...................................................................................................144
E
x
Index
145
Table of Contents
(ADVANCED USER’S GUIDE)
The Advanced User's Guide explains the following features and operations.
You can view the Advanced User's Guide on the Documentation CD-ROM.
1
General setup
8
Memory storage
Volume Settings
Automatic Daylight Saving Time
Sleep Mode
LCD screen
Dial Prefix
Mode Timer
2
3
PhotoCapture Center™ operations
Print Images
PhotoCapture Center™ print settings
Scan to a memory card or USB Flash
memory drive
Security features
Secure Function Lock 2.0
9
Sending a fax
5
Receiving a fax
Printing photos from a
camera
Printing photos directly from a
PictBridge camera
Printing photos directly from a digital
camera (without PictBridge)
Additional sending options
Additional sending operations
Polling overview
4
PhotoCapture Center™:
Printing photos from a
memory card or USB Flash
memory drive
A
Routine maintenance
Cleaning and checking the machine
Packing and shipping the machine
Memory Receive (Black & White only)
Remote Retrieval
Additional receiving operations
Polling overview
B
Glossary
Dialing and storing numbers
C
Index
Voice operations
Additional dialing operations
Additional ways to store numbers
6
Printing reports
Fax reports
Reports
7
Making copies
Copy settings
xi
xii
1
General information
Using the
documentation
1
WARNING
1
WARNING indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injuries.
Thank you for buying a Brother machine!
Reading the documentation will help you
make the most of your machine.
Symbols and conventions
used in the documentation
The following symbols and conventions are
used throughout the documentation.
Bold
Bold typeface identifies specific
keys on the machine’s control
panel or on the computer
screen.
Italics
Italicized typeface emphasizes
an important point or refers you
to a related topic.
Courier
New
Text in Courier New font
identifies messages on the
LCD of the machine.
1
CAUTION
1
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injuries.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
may result in damage to property or loss of
product functionality.
Notes tell you how you should
respond to a situation that may arise
or give tips about how the operation
works with other features.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to
possible electrical shock.
1
Chapter 1
Accessing the
Advanced User’s
Guide, Software User’s
Guide, Network User’s
Guide, and Network
Glossary
a
Turn on your computer. Insert the
Documentation CD-ROM into your
CD-ROM drive. For Windows® users, go
to step c.
Note
(Windows® users)
If the screen does not appear
automatically, go to
My Computer (Computer), double-click
the CD-ROM icon, and then double-click
index.html.
b
2
(Macintosh users)
Double-click the Documentation
CD-ROM icon, and then double-click
index.html.
Click your country.
d
Point to your language, point to
View Guide, and then click the guide
you want to read.
1
This Basic User’s Guide does not contain all
the information about the machine, such as
how to use the advanced features for Fax,
Copy, PhotoCapture Center™, Printer,
Scanner, PC-Fax, and Network. When you
are ready to learn detailed information about
these operations, read the
Advanced User’s Guide,
Software User’s Guide,
Network User’s Guide, and
Network Glossary that are on the
Documentation CD-ROM.
Viewing Documentation
c
1
General information
Presto! PageManager User’s Guide
(Macintosh users)
Note
• (Windows® users only)
Your Web browser may display a yellow
bar at the top of the page that contains a
security warning about Active X controls.
For the page to display correctly you must
click on the bar, click
Allow Blocked Content, then click Yes
in the Security Warning dialog box.
®
Presto! PageManager is available as a
download from
http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/
brother/PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
 The complete Presto! PageManager
User’s Guide can be viewed from the Help
selection in the Presto! PageManager
application.
1
• (Windows users only)
For faster access, you can copy all user
documentation in PDF format to a local
folder on your computer. Point to your
language, then click Copy to local disk.
1
How to find Network setup
instructions
Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6.0 or greater.
How to find Scanning instructions
There are several ways you can scan
documents. You can find the instructions as
follows:
Software User’s Guide
 Scanning
1
Note
1
1
Your machine can be connected to a wireless
or wired network. You can find basic setup
instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your
wireless access point or router supports Wi-Fi
Protected Setup or AOSS™, you can also
follow the steps in the Quick Setup Guide. For
more information about network setup,
please see the Network User's Guide on the
Documentation CD-ROM.
 ControlCenter
 Network Scanning
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™12SE with OCR
How-to-Guides
(Windows® users)
 The complete ScanSoft™
PaperPort™12SE with OCR How-toGuides can be viewed from the Help
selection in the ScanSoft™
PaperPort™12SE application.
(Windows® 2000 users need to download
and install PaperPort™11SE from the
Web site.)
3
Chapter 1
Accessing Brother
Support (Windows®)
1
You can find all the contacts you will need,
such as Web support (Brother Solutions
Center), Customer Service and Brother
Authorized Service Centers in Brother
numbers on page i and on the Installation
CD-ROM.
 Click Brother Support on the Top Menu.
The following screen will appear:
 To access our Web site
(http://www.brother.com/), click
Brother Home Page.
 To view all Brother Numbers, including
Customer Service numbers for the USA
and Canada, click Support Information.
 To access the USA Brother online
shopping mall
(http://www.brothermall.com/) for
additional product and services
information, click Brother Mall.com.
 To access Canada’s Brother online
shopping mall (http://www.brother.ca/) for
additional product and services
information, click Shop Online (Canada).
 For the latest news and product support
information
(http://solutions.brother.com/), click
Brother Solutions Center.
4
 To visit our Web site for genuine Brother
Supplies
(http://www.brother.com/original/),
click Supplies Information.
 To access the Brother CreativeCenter
(http://www.brother.com/creativecenter/)
for FREE photo projects and printable
downloads,
click Brother CreativeCenter.
 To return to the Top Menu, click Back or
if you are finished, click Exit.
General information
Accessing Brother
Support (Macintosh)
1
1
You can find all the contacts you will need,
such as Web support (Brother Solutions
Center) on the Installation CD-ROM.
 Double-click the Brother Support icon.
The following screen will appear:
 To download and install Presto!
PageManager, click
Presto! PageManager.
 To register your machine from the Brother
Product Register Page
(http://www.brother.com/registration/),
click On-Line Registration.
 For the latest news and product support
information
(http://solutions.brother.com/), click
Brother Solutions Center.
 To visit our Web site for genuine Brother
Supplies
(http://www.brother.com/original/), click
Supplies Information.
5
Chapter 1
Control panel overview
9
1
7
8
1
1
2
Fax and Copy keys:
 Duplex
Press this key to copy, scan or fax both
sides of the paper.
 N in 1 Copy
Press this key to make N in 1 or Poster
copies.
 Fax Preview
Lets you preview incoming faxes on the
LCD.
 Tray Setting
Press this key to choose the tray you want
to use for printing.
Mode keys:

FAX
Lets you access FAX mode.

SCAN
Lets you access SCAN mode.

COPY
Lets you access COPY mode.

PHOTO CAPTURE
Lets you access PHOTO CAPTURE mode.
6
2
3
Dial Pad
Use these keys to dial telephone and fax
numbers and as a keyboard for entering
information into the machine.
This function transfers to the touchscreen
when you store quick dial numbers.
(Canada only) The # key lets you temporarily
switch the dialing mode during a telephone call
from Pulse to Tone.
4
Telephone keys:
 Redial/Pause
Redials the last 30 numbers called. It also
inserts a pause when dialing numbers.
 Hook
Press before dialing when you want to
listen to make sure a fax machine has
answered, and then press Black Start or
Color Start.
Also, press this key after picking up the
handset of the external telephone during
the F/T pseudo/double-ring.
General information
1
6
3
5
Start keys:


Color Start
Lets you start sending faxes or making
copies in full color. Also lets you start a
scanning operation (in color or black &
white, depending on the scan setting in the
ControlCenter software).
6
Stop/Exit
Stops an operation or exits the menu.
7
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
This is a Touchscreen LCD. You can access
the menus and options by pressing buttons
displayed on the screen.
Also, you can adjust the angle of the LCD
screen by lifting it.
5
8
One Touch keys
These 8 keys give you instant access to 16
previously stored numbers.
Shift
To access One Touch numbers 9 to 16, hold
down Shift as you press the One Touch key.
9
On/Off
You can turn the machine on and off.
Press On/Off to turn the machine on.
Press and hold down On/Off to turn the
machine off. The LCD will show
Shutting Down and will stay on for a few
seconds before going off.
If you have connected an external telephone or
TAD, it is always available.
If you turn the machine off, it will still
periodically clean the print head to maintain
print quality. To prolong print head life, provide
the best ink cartridge economy, and maintain
print quality, you should keep your machine
connected to the power at all times.
Black Start
Lets you start sending faxes or making
copies in black & white. Also lets you start
a scanning operation (in color or black &
white depending on the scan setting in the
ControlCenter software).
4
7
Chapter 1
LCD Touchscreen
1
8
The LCD shows the current machine status
when the machine is idle.
Wireless Status
A four-level indicator shows the current
wireless signal strength if you are using a
wireless connection.
9 8 7
10
0
6
5
1
2
3
4
1
Faxes in memory
Shows how many received faxes are in the
memory.
2
Fax Preview
Lets you preview received faxes.
3
MENU
Lets you access the main menu.
4
Ink indicator
Lets you see the available ink volume.
Also, lets you access the Ink menu.
5
Current Receive Mode
Lets you see the current Receive Mode.
 Fax (Fax Only)
 F/T (Fax/Tel)
 TAD (External TAD)
 Mnl (Manual)
Note
When the Distinctive Ring feature is turned on,
the LCD shows D/R. For details, see
Distinctive Ring on page 43.
6
Memory Status
Lets you see the available memory in the
machine.
7
Phone Book
Lets you set up your phone book of
One Touch, Speed Dial and Group numbers.
Also, you can search the phone book for the
number you want to dial.
8
9
Max
Call History
Lets you view a list of outgoing calls and the
Caller ID history.
Also, lets you fax the number you have chosen
from the lists.
10 New Fax
When Fax Preview is set to On, you can see
how many new faxes you have received.
The warning icon
appears when
there is an error or maintenance message.
For details, see Error and Maintenance
messages on page 71.
Note
If you receive a fax containing multiple
paper sizes (for example, a Letter size
page and a Ledger size page), the
machine may create and store a file for
each paper size. The LCD may show that
more than one fax job has been received.
General information
Basic Operations
1
f
Press Fax/Tel.
1
To operate the Touchscreen use your finger
to press the MENU or option button directly on
the Touchscreen. To display and access all
the screen menus or options in a setting,
press d c or a b to scroll through them.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT press the Touchscreen with a
sharp object, such as a pen or stylus. It
may damage the machine.
The following steps show how to change a
setting in the machine. In this example the
Receive Mode setting is changed from
Fax Only to Fax/Tel.
a
b
Note
Press
level.
g
to go back to the previous
Press Stop/Exit.
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
c
d
Press Initial Setup.
e
Press Receive Mode.
Press a or b to display Receive Mode.
9
2
Loading paper
Loading paper and
other print media
Note
2
Note
For Tray #2, see Loading paper in paper
tray #2 on page 13.
Loading paper in paper
tray #1
a
2
• When you are using Legal, Ledger or A3
size paper, press the universal guide
release button (1) as you slide out the
front of the paper tray. Make sure that
when using Legal or Ledger or A3 size
paper, the triangular mark on the output
paper tray cover is aligned with the line
indicating Legal (2) or Ledger or A3 (3)
size, as shown in the illustration.
2
2
Pull the paper tray completely out of the
machine.
3
1
Note
If the paper support flap (1) is open, close
it, and then close the paper support (2).
1
2
10
• If you are using A5 or smaller size paper,
make sure that the paper tray is not
extended.
• When you load a different paper size in a
tray, you will need to change the paper
size setting in the machine at the same
time. (See Paper Size and Type
on page 22.)
Loading paper
b
Open the output paper tray cover (1).
d
Fan the stack of paper well to avoid
paper jams and misfeeds.
2
1
Note
Always make sure that the paper is not
curled.
c
With both hands, gently press and slide
the paper length guide (1) and then the
paper side guides (2) to fit the paper
size.
Make sure that the triangular marks (3)
on the paper length guide (1) and paper
side guides (2) line up with the mark for
the paper size you are using.
e
Gently put the paper into the paper tray
print side down and top edge in first.
Check that the paper is flat in the tray.
2
3
1
11
Chapter 2
Note
g
When you put Photo L size into the paper
tray, you need to release the hinges on
both sides of the output paper tray cover,
and push the cover over. And then slide
the paper length guide.
Close the output paper tray cover.
Check that the paper is flat in the tray
and below the maximum paper
mark (1).
Overfilling the paper tray may cause
paper jams.
1
h
f
Slowly push the paper tray completely
into the machine.
Gently adjust the paper side guides to fit
the paper with both hands.
Make sure the paper side guides touch
the sides of the paper.
WARNING
DO NOT push Tray #1 into the machine too
quickly. Doing this may cause injury to your
hand by trapping it between Tray #1 and
Tray #2. Please push Tray #1 in slowly.
Note
Be careful not to push the paper in too far;
it may lift at the back of the tray and cause
feed problems.
12
Loading paper
i
While holding the paper tray in place,
pull out the paper support (1) until it
clicks, and then unfold the paper
support flap (2).
Loading paper in paper
tray #2
2
Note
• You can only use plain paper sizes
Ledger, Letter, Legal, Executive, A3 or A4
in Tray #2.
2
• When you use the Borderless printing
feature paper must be fed from Tray #1.
1
a
Pull the paper tray completely out of the
machine.
Note
Before you shorten Tray #1, take the paper
out of the tray. Then shorten the tray by
pressing the universal guide release
button (1). Adjust the paper length
guide (2) to fit the paper size you are going
to use. Then put the paper in the tray.
Note
1
• If you are using Ledger, Legal or A3 size
paper, press the universal guide release
button (1) as you slide out the front of the
paper tray until it clicks.
• You can check if the length of the tray is
adjusted properly by opening the paper
tray cover.
1
2
13
2
Chapter 2
b
d
Open the paper tray cover (1).
1
Fan the stack of paper well to avoid
paper jams and misfeeds.
Note
Always make sure that the paper is not
curled.
e
c
Using both hands, gently press and
slide the paper length guide (1) and then
the paper side guides (2) to fit the paper
size.
Make sure that the triangular marks (3)
on the paper length guide (1) and paper
side guides (2) line up with the marks for
the paper size you are using.
Gently put the paper into the paper tray
print side down and top edge in first.
Check that the paper is flat in the tray
and below the maximum paper
mark (1).
Overfilling the paper tray may cause
paper jams.
1
2
f
3
1
14
Using both hands, gently adjust the
paper side guides so they touch the
sides of the paper stack.
Loading paper
Note
j
Be careful not to push the paper in too far;
it may lift at the back of the tray and cause
feed problems.
g
Close the paper tray cover.
h
Slowly push the paper tray back into the
machine.
Pull tray #1 out of the machine.
Press the universal guide release
button (1) as you slide out the front of
the paper tray.
2
1
k
i
Do one of the following:
Open the output paper tray cover and
adjust the paper length guide (1) for the
paper.
 If you are using Ledger, Legal or A3
size paper, go to step j.
Note
When you are using large size paper in
Tray #2, you may need to extend Tray #1
out over Tray #2 to prevent printed pages
from falling off the output tray.
1
 If you are using Letter, Executive or
A4 size paper, go to step m.
15
Chapter 2
l
m
Close the output paper tray cover and
slowly push the paper tray into the
machine.
Note
If you are finished using Ledger, Legal or
A3 size paper and want to use a smaller
paper size, take the paper out of the tray.
Then shorten the tray by pressing the
universal guide release button (1). Adjust
the paper length guide (2) to fit the paper
size you are going to use. Then put the
smaller paper into the tray.
Pull out the paper support (1) until it
clicks and unfold the paper support
flap (2).
1
2
1
2
16
Loading paper
Loading paper in the manual
feed slot
b
2
Slide the manual feed slot paper guides
to the width of the paper that you are
going to use.
You can load special print media one at a
time into this slot. Use the manual feed slot to
print or copy on envelopes, labels or thicker
paper.
2
Note
• The machine automatically turns on the
Manual Feed mode when you put paper in
the manual feed slot.
• When you use the Borderless printing
feature paper must be fed from Tray #1.
a
Open the manual feed slot cover.
c
Put only one sheet of paper in the
manual feed slot with the side to be
printed face up.
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT put more than one sheet of paper
in the manual feed slot at any one time.
Doing this may cause a paper jam. Wait
until the LCD shows
Put paper in Manual Feed Slot
Then Press Start before you feed the
next sheet of paper in the manual feed
slot.
• DO NOT put paper in the manual feed slot
when you are printing from Tray #1 or
Tray #2. Doing this may cause a paper
jam.
17
Chapter 2
d
Using both hands gently adjust the
manual feed slot paper guides to fit the
paper.
Note
When loading an envelope, or a sheet of
thick paper, push the envelope into the
manual feed slot until you feel it grab the
envelope.
f
If the data does not fit on one page, the
LCD will prompt you to load another
page. Place another sheet of paper in
the manual feed slot, and then press
Black Start or Color Start.
Note
• Make sure printing has finished before you
close the manual feed slot.
Note
• When paper is placed in the manual feed
slot, the machine always prints from the
manual feed slot.
• DO NOT press the paper guides too tightly
against the paper. Doing this may cause
the paper to fold.
• Paper inserted in the manual feed slot
while a test page, fax or report is being
printed will be ejected.
• Place the paper in the center of the
manual feed slot between the paper
guides. If the paper is not centered, pull it
out and insert it again at the center
position.
• During the machine's cleaning process,
paper you place in the manual feed slot
will be ejected. Wait until the machine
finishes its cleaning, and then put the
paper into the manual feed slot again.
e
18
Using both hands, put one sheet of
paper in the manual feed slot until the
front edge touches the paper feed roller
and the machine beeps. Let go of the
paper when you feel the machine feed
the paper in a short distance. The LCD
will show
Manual Feed Slot ready.
Loading paper
Loading envelopes and
postcards
About envelopes
Loading envelopes and postcards
2
a
2
Before loading, press the corners and
sides of envelopes or postcards to make
them as flat as possible.
2
2
 Use envelopes that weigh from 20 to 25 lb
(80 to 95 g/m2).
 Some envelopes need margin settings to
be set in the application. Make sure you
do a test print first before printing many
envelopes.
IMPORTANT
If envelopes or postcards are “doublefeeding,” put one envelope or postcard in
the paper tray at a time.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use any of the following types of
envelopes, as they will cause paper feed
problems:
• That are of a baggy construction.
• That have windows.
• That are embossed (have raised
writing on them).
• That have clasps or staples.
• That are pre-printed on the inside.
Glue
Double flaps
Occasionally you may experience paper
feed problems caused by the thickness,
size and flap shape of the envelopes you
are using.
19
Chapter 2
b
Put envelopes or postcards in the paper
tray with the address side down and the
leading edge in first as shown in the
illustration. Using both hands, gently
press and slide the paper length
guide (1) and paper side guides (2) to fit
the size of the envelopes or postcards.
If you have problems when printing on
envelopes, try the following suggestions:
a
b
Open the envelope flap.
c
Adjust the size and margin in your
application.
Make sure the open flap is to the back
edge of the envelope when printing.
2
1
20
2
Loading paper
Printable area
2
The printable area depends on the settings in the application you are using. The figures below
show the unprintable areas on cut-sheet paper and envelopes. The machine can print in the
shaded areas of cut-sheet paper only when the Borderless print feature is available and turned
on. (See Printing for Windows® or Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the Software User’s
Guide.)
Cut-Sheet Paper
3
Envelopes
3
4
1
4
1
2
1
2
Top (1)
Bottom (2)
Left (3)
Right (4)
Cut-Sheet
0.12 in. (3 mm)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
Cut-Sheet (Duplex print
when using Ledger or
A3 size)
0.87 in. (22 mm)
0.87 in. (22 mm)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
Envelopes
0.87 in. (22 mm) 1
0.87 in. (22 mm)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
The top margin of Y4 envelopes is 0.47 in. (12 mm).
Note
• The Borderless feature is not available for envelopes and duplex printing.
• When you use the Borderless printing feature paper must be fed from Tray #1.
21
2
Chapter 2
Paper settings
Paper Size and Type
To get the best print quality, set the machine
for the type of paper you are using.
You can use eight sizes of paper for printing
copies: Letter, Legal, Ledger, A4, A5, A3,
Executive and 4  6 in. (10  15 cm) and five
sizes for printing faxes: Ledger, Letter, Legal,
A3 or A4. When you load a different size of
paper in the machine, you will need to change
the paper size setting at the same time so
your machine can fit an incoming fax on the
page.
a
b
c
Press Tray Setting.
Press the displayed paper size or paper
type for Tray#1, or press the displayed
paper size for Tray#2.
Do one of the following:
 If you chose the paper size for
Tray#1, press d or c to display the
paper size options, and press
Letter, Legal, Ledger, A4, A5,
A3, EXE or 4"x6".
 If you chose the paper type for
Tray#1, press Plain Paper,
Inkjet Paper, Brother BP71,
Brother BP61, Other Glossy
or Transparency.
 If you chose Tray#2, press Letter,
Legal, Ledger, A4, A3 or EXE.
d
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
• You can only use plain paper in Tray#2.
• The machine ejects paper with the printed
surface face up onto the paper tray in the
front of the machine. When you use
transparencies or glossy paper, remove
each sheet at once to prevent smudging
or paper jams.
22
2
2
Tray use in COPY mode
You can change the default tray the machine
will use for copies.
Auto Select will allow your machine to
feed paper from either Tray #1 or Tray #2,
using the paper type and size settings from
the COPY key menu.
To change the default setting, follow the
instructions below:
a
b
Press Tray Setting.
Press a or b on the Touchscreen to
display Tray Use:Copy.
c
d
Press Tray Use:Copy.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
Press Tray#1, Tray#2 or
Auto Select.
Note
You can temporarily change the paper
size and tray selection for the next copy by
using the COPY mode key. (See Paper
Size on page 55 and Tray Select
on page 56.)
2
Loading paper
Tray use in FAX mode
You can change the default tray the machine
will use for printing received faxes.
Auto Select will allow your machine to
take paper from Tray #1 first, or from Tray #2
if:
 Tray #2 is set to a different paper size that
is more suitable for the received faxes.
 Both trays are using the same size paper
and Tray #1 is not set to use plain paper.
a
b
c
d
e
Press Tray Setting.
Press a or b on the Touchscreen to
display Tray Use:Fax.
Press Tray Use:Fax.
Press Tray#1, Tray#2 or
Auto Select.
Press Stop/Exit.
2
Secure Paper Feed mode for
Ledger size Short Grain Paper
2
If your printed pages are smudged when
using Ledger paper, your paper may be short
grain paper. Choose LGR - Short Grain
and set it to On to avoid this problem.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.
Press a or b to display
LGR - Short Grain.
Press LGR - Short Grain.
Press On.
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
• If you are not sure about the type of paper
you are using, consult the paper
packaging or paper manufacturer for
paper specifications.
• Printing will be slower when using the
LGR - Short Grain setting.
23
2
Chapter 2
Acceptable paper and
other print media
The print quality can be affected by the type
of paper you use in the machine.
To get the best print quality for the settings
you have chosen, always set the Paper Type
to match the type of paper you load.
You can use plain paper, inkjet paper (coated
paper), glossy paper, transparencies and
envelopes.
We recommend testing various paper types
before buying large quantities.
For best results, use Brother paper.
 When you print on inkjet paper (coated
paper), transparencies and glossy paper,
be sure to choose the proper print media
in the Basic tab of the printer driver or in
the Paper Type setting of the machine’s
menu. (See Paper Size and Type
on page 22.)
 When you print on Brother Photo paper,
load one extra sheet of the same photo
paper in the paper tray. An extra sheet has
been included in the paper package for
this purpose.
 When you use transparencies or photo
paper, remove each sheet at once to
prevent smudging or paper jams.
 Avoid touching the printed surface of the
paper immediately after printing; the
surface may not be completely dry and
may stain your fingers.
24
Recommended print media
2
To get the best print quality, we suggest using
Brother paper. (See the table below.)
We recommend using “3M Transparency
Film” when you print on transparencies.
Brother paper
Paper Type
Item
Premium Plus Glossy
Photo
 Ledger
BP71GLGR
 Letter
BP71GLTR
 4"  6"
BP71GP
Premium Glossy Photo
 Letter
BP61GLL (USA only)
 4"  6"
BP61GLP (USA only)
Matte Inkjet (Letter)
BP60ML (USA only)
Plain Inkjet
 Ledger
BP60PLGR (USA only)
 Letter
BP60PL100 (USA
only)
2
Loading paper
Handling and using print
media
Labels
2
 Store paper in its original packaging and
keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and
away from moisture, direct sunlight and
heat.
 Avoid touching the shiny (coated) side of
photo paper. Load photo paper with the
shiny side facing down.
 Avoid touching either side of
transparencies because they absorb
water and perspiration easily, and this
may cause decreased output quality.
Transparencies designed for laser
printers/copiers may stain your next
document. Use only transparencies
recommended for inkjet printing.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use the following kinds of paper:
• Damaged, curled, wrinkled, or
irregularly shaped
1
2
Labels should be arranged so that they cover
the entire length and width of the sheet. Using
labels with spaces may result in labels
peeling off and causing serious jams or print
problems.
Types of labels to avoid
2
2
Do not use labels that are damaged, curled,
wrinkled or an unusual shape.
IMPORTANT
• Avoid feeding labels with the carrier sheet
exposed because your machine will be
damaged.
• DO NOT reuse or insert labels that have
previously been used or are missing few
labels on the sheet.
Paper capacity of the output paper
tray cover
2
Up to 50 sheets of Letter, Legal or A4 20 lb
(80 g/m2) paper.
1
1
0.08 in. (2 mm) or greater curl may
cause jams to occur.
 Transparencies and photo paper must be
picked up from the output paper tray cover
one page at a time to avoid smudging.
• Extremely shiny or highly textured
• Paper that cannot be arranged
uniformly when stacked
• Paper made with a short grain
25
Chapter 2
Choosing the right print media
2
Paper type and size for each operation
Paper Type
Cut-Sheet
Cards
Envelopes
Paper Size
Fax
Copy
Photo
Printer
Capture
11  17 in. (279.4  431.8 mm)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Letter
8 1/2  11 in. (215.9  279.4 mm) Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
A3
11.7  16.5 in. (297  420 mm)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
A4
8.3  11.7 in. (210  297 mm)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Legal
8 1/2  14 in. (215.9  355.6 mm) Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Executive
7 1/4  10 1/2 in. (184  267 mm) –
Yes
–
Yes
JIS B4
10.1  14.3 in. (257  364 mm)
–
–
–
User
Defined
JIS B5
7.2  10.1 in. (182  257 mm)
–
–
–
User
Defined
A5
5.8  8.3 in. (148  210 mm)
–
Yes
–
Yes
A6
4.1  5.8 in. (105  148 mm)
–
–
–
Yes
Photo
4  6 in. (10  15 cm)
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Photo L
3 1/2  5 in. (89  127 mm)
–
–
–
Yes
Photo 2L
5  7 in. (13  18 cm)
–
–
Yes
Yes
Index Card
5  8 in. (127  203 mm)
–
–
–
Yes
Postcard 1
3.9  5.8 in. (100  148 mm)
–
–
–
User
Defined
Postcard 2
(Double)
5.8  7.9 in. (148  200 mm)
–
–
–
User
Defined
C5 Envelope
6.4  9 in. (162  229 mm)
–
–
–
Yes
DL Envelope
4.3  8.7 in. (110  220 mm)
–
–
–
Yes
COM-10
4 1/8  9 1/2 in. (105  241 mm)
–
–
–
Yes
Monarch
3 7/8  7 1/2 in. (98  191 mm)
–
–
–
Yes
Y4 Envelope
4.1  9.3 in. (105  235 mm)
–
–
–
Yes
8 1/2  11 in. (215.9  279.4 mm) –
Yes
–
Yes
A4
8.3  11.7 in. (210  297 mm)
–
Yes
–
Yes
Legal
8 1/2  14 in. (215.9  355.6 mm) –
Yes
–
Yes
A5
5.8  8.3 in. (148  210 mm)
–
Yes
–
Yes
–
–
–
User
Defined
Labels 1
26
Usage
Ledger
Transparencies Letter
1
2
Manual Feed Slot only
Loading paper
Paper capacity of the paper trays
Paper size
Paper types
No. of
sheets
Letter, Ledger, A3, Legal,
Executive, A4, A5, A6, JIS B4,
JIS B5, Envelopes (commercial
No.10, DL, C5, Monarch, Y4),
Photo, Photo L, Photo 2L, Index
Card, Postcard 1, Postcard 2
Plain Paper
250 1
Inkjet Paper
20
Glossy Paper, Photo
20
Index Card, Postcard
30
Envelopes, Transparencies
10
Tray #2
Letter, Ledger, A3, Legal,
Executive, A4, JIS B4, JIS B5
Plain Paper
250 1
Manual Feed Slot
Letter, Ledger, A3, Legal,
Executive, A4, A5, A6, JIS B4,
JIS B5, Envelopes (commercial
No.10, DL, C5, Monarch, Y4),
Photo, Photo L, Photo 2L, Index
Card, Postcard 1, Postcard 2
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper,
Glossy Paper, Envelopes,
Transparencies and Labels
1
Tray #1
1
2
2
Up to 250 sheets of plain paper 20 lb (80 g/m 2).
Paper weight and thickness
Paper Type
2
Weight
Thickness
Plain Paper
17 to 32 lb (64 to 120 g/m2)
3 to 6 mil (0.08 to 0.15 mm)
(Tray #2)
17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g/m2)
3 to 6 mil (0.08 to 0.15 mm)
Inkjet Paper
17 to 53 lb (64 to 200 g/m2)
3 to 10 mil (0.08 to 0.25 mm)
Glossy Paper 1
Up to 58 lb (Up to 220 g/m2)
Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm)
Photo 4"  6" 1
Up to 58 lb (Up to 220 g/m2)
Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm)
Index Card
Up to 32 lb (Up to 120 g/m2)
Up to 6 mil (Up to 0.15 mm)
Postcard 1
Up to 53 lb (Up to 200 g/m2)
Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm)
Envelopes
20 to 25 lb (75 to 95 g/m 2)
Up to 20 mil (Up to 0.52 mm)
Transparencies
–
–
Labels
–
–
Cut-Sheet
Plain Paper
Cards
Postcard 2
1
BP71 69 lb (260 g/m 2) paper is especially designed for Brother inkjet machines.
27
3
Loading documents
How to load
documents
How to load documents
• DO NOT pull on the document while it is
feeding.
• DO NOT use paper that is curled,
wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paper
clipped, pasted or taped.
Duplex (2-sided) documents can be faxed,
copied, or scanned up to Legal size using the
ADF.
• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or
fabric.
3
Make sure documents with ink or correction
fluid are completely dry.
The ADF can hold up to 35 pages and feeds
each sheet individually. Use standard 20 lb
(80 g/m2) paper and always fan the pages
before putting them in the ADF.
Document Sizes Supported
a
Unfold the ADF Document Support (1)
and the ADF Document Output Support
Flap (2).
1
3
Recommended Paper: 20 lb LTR (80 g/m2
A4)
Length:
5.8 to 17 in.
(148 to 431.8 mm)
Width:
5.8 to 11.7 in.
(148 to 297 mm)
Weight:
17 to 24 lb
3
IMPORTANT
3
You can send a fax, make copies, and scan
from the ADF (automatic document feeder)
and from the scanner glass.
Using the ADF
3
2
(64 to 90 g/m2)
b
c
Fan the pages well.
Adjust the paper guides (1) to fit the
width of your document.
1
28
Loading documents
d
How to load documents
Place your document, face up, top
edge first in the ADF until the LCD
shows ADF Ready and you feel it touch
the feed rollers.
Note
To use the scanner glass, the ADF must
be empty.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT leave a thick document on the
scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may
jam.
Using the scanner glass
3
a
b
Lift the document cover.
c
Close the document cover.
Using the document guidelines on the
left and top, place the document
face down in the upper left corner of the
scanner glass.
3
You can use the scanner glass to fax, copy or
scan pages of a book or one page at a time.
Document Sizes Supported
Length:
Up to 17 in. (431.8 mm)
Width:
Up to 11.7 in. (297 mm)
Weight:
Up to 4.4 lb (2 kg)
3
IMPORTANT
If you are scanning a book or thick
document, DO NOT slam the cover down
or press on it.
29
3
Chapter 3
Unscannable area
3
The scannable area depends on the settings
in the application you are using. The figures
below show unscannable areas.
3
4
1
2
Usage
Fax
Document Top (1)
Size
Bottom (2)
Left (3)
Ledger
0.15 in.
(3.7 mm)
Letter
Legal
Copy
Scan
1
30
0.12 in.
(3 mm)
Right (4)
0.16 in.
(4 mm)
A3
0.18 in.
(4.5 mm)
A4
0.12 in. 1
(3 mm)
All paper
sizes
0.12 in.
(3 mm)
The unscannable area is 0.04 in (1 mm) when you
use the ADF.
4
Sending a fax
How to send a fax
The following steps show how to send a fax.
a
When the machine is idle, the date and
time appear on the LCD. When you want
to send a fax, or change fax send or
receive settings, press the
(FAX) key to illuminate it in
blue.
4
b
4
Do one of the following to load your
document:
 Place the document face up in the
ADF. (See Using the ADF
on page 28.)
 Load your document face down on
the scanner glass. (See Using the
scanner glass on page 29.)
Note
• To send color faxes with multiple pages
use the ADF.
• If you send a black & white fax from the
ADF while the memory is full, it will be sent
in real time.
 The LCD shows:
• You can use the scanner glass to fax
pages of a book one at a time. The
document can be up to Ledger or A3 size.
• Since you can only scan one page at a
time, it is easier to use the ADF if you are
sending a multiple-page document.
31
4
Chapter 4
c
You can change the following fax sending
settings. Press FAX and then press
d or c to scroll through the fax settings.
When the setting you want is displayed,
press it and choose your option.
(Basic User's Guide)
For details changing the following fax
sending settings, see pages 33 to 34.
 Glass ScanSize
 Color Fax Transmission
 Preview Outgoing Fax
Note
• You can preview a fax message before
sending it by setting Preview to On. (See
How to preview an outgoing fax
on page 33.)
• If your network supports the LDAP
protocol you can search for fax numbers
and E-mail addresses on your server.
(See LDAP operation in the Network
User’s Guide.)
e
 Transmission Verification Report
(Setup)
Faxing from the ADF
 The machine starts scanning and
sending the document.
(Advanced User's Guide)
For more advanced fax sending
operations and settings, see Chapter 3
Sending a fax in the Advanced User’s
Guide:
Faxing from the scanner glass
 If you pressed Black Start, the
machine starts scanning the first
page. Go to step f.
 Contrast
 If you pressed Color Start, the LCD
asks if you want to send a color fax.
Press Yes to confirm. The machine
starts sending the document.
 Fax Resolution
 Set New Defaults
 Factory Reset
 Duplex fax
 Faxing at End of Call
f
 Broadcasting
The machine starts sending the
document.
 Overseas Mode
 Delayed Fax
 To send more than one page, press
Yes and go to step g.
 Batch TX
 Polled Transmit
d
Enter the fax number.
Using the dial pad
Using the Phone Book
 Phone Book
Using call history
 Outgoing Call
 Caller ID hist.
32
When the LCD asks you Next Page?,
do one of the following:
 To send a single page, press No (or
press Black Start again).
 Real Time TX
 Canceling Waiting Jobs
Press Black Start or Color Start.
g
Place the next page on the scanner
glass.
Press Black Start.
The machine starts scanning the page.
(Repeat steps f and g for each
additional page.)
Sending a fax
Stop faxing
4
To stop faxing, press Stop/Exit.
Setting scanner glass size for
faxing
4
When documents are A4 size, you need to
set the Scan Size to A4. If you do not, the
bottom portion of the faxes will be missing.
a
b
c
d
Press
(FAX).
Press d or c to display
Glass Scan Size.
Press Glass Scan Size.
Press Letter, Legal, Ledger, A4 or
A3.
Note
• You can save the setting you use most
often by setting it as the default. (See
Setting your changes as the new default in
chapter 3 of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
• This setting is only available for sending
documents from the scanner glass.
Color fax transmission
How to preview an outgoing
fax
4
You can preview a fax message before you
send it. You must set Real Time
Transmission and Polling RX to Off before
you use this feature.
a
Press
b
c
d
e
f
Press d or c to display Preview.
g
Press Black Start.
The machine starts scanning the
document and the outgoing fax appears
on the LCD.
When the fax is displayed, press MENU
on the Touchscreen and the following
buttons will appear. Press the button
you want to use to perform an operation.
(FAX).
4
Press Preview.
Press On.
Load the document.
Enter the fax number using the dial pad,
One Touch or Speed Dial.
Button
Description
4
Enlarge the fax.
Your machine can send a color fax to
machines that support this feature.
Reduce the fax.
Color faxes cannot be stored in the machine’s
memory. When you send a color fax, the
machine will send it in real time (even if
Real Time TX is set to Off).
or
Scroll vertically.
or
Scroll horizontally.
Rotate the fax clockwise.
Go back to the previous page.
Canceling a fax in progress
If you want to cancel a fax while the machine
is scanning, dialing or sending, press
Stop/Exit.
Go to the next page.
4
Close the preview table.
Note
To send a color fax do not use Fax
Preview.
33
Chapter 4
h
a
b
c
d
Press Black Start.
Note
The fax message in the memory will be
sent and then erased when you press
Black Start.
Transmission Verification
Report
4
You can use the Transmission Verification
Report as proof that you sent a fax. This
report lists the sender’s name or fax number,
the time and date of transmission, duration of
transmission, number of pages sent, and
whether or not the transmission was
successful.
There are several settings available for the
Transmission Verification Report:
 On: Prints a report after every fax you send.
 On+Image: Prints a report after every fax
you send. A portion of the fax’s first page
appears on the report.
 Off: Prints a report if your fax is
unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
The report will also print if the receiving
machine modifies the size of the
document you fax, or if you send a color
fax that the receiving machine prints in
black and white. Off is the default setting.
 Off+Image: Prints a report if your fax is
unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
The report will also print if your fax is
successful, but the receiving machine
modifies the size of the document you fax,
or if you send a color fax that the receiving
machine prints in black and white.
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on
the report.
 Off2: Prints a report only if your fax is
unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
 Off2+Image: Prints a report only if your
fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission
error. A portion of the fax’s first page
appears on the report.
34
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Report Setting.
e
f
g
Press Report Setting.
h
Press Stop/Exit.
Press Transmission.
Press On, On+Image, Off,
Off+Image, Off2 or Off2+Image.
Note
• If you choose On+Image, Off+Image or
Off2+Image the image will only appear
on the Transmission Verification Report if
Real Time Transmission is set to Off. The
image will not appear on the report when
you send a color fax. (See Real Time
Transmission in chapter 3 of the
Advanced User’s Guide.)
• If your transmission is successful, "OK" will
appear next to "RESULT" on the
Transmission Verification Report. If
transmission is not successful, "NG" will
appear next to "RESULT."
5
Receiving a fax
5
Receive Modes
5
Choose the correct Receive Mode
5
The correct Receive Mode is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber
services (Voice Mail, Distinctive Ring, etc.) you have (or will be using) on the same line as the
Brother machine.
Will you be using a Distinctive Ring number for receiving faxes?
Brother uses the term “Distinctive Ring” but different telephone companies may have other names for this
service, such as Custom Ringing, RingMaster, Personalized Ring, Teen Ring, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call,
Data Ident-A-Call, Smart Ring and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing. (See Distinctive Ring
on page 43 for instructions on setting up your machine using this feature.)
Will you be using Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine?
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine, there is a strong possibility
that Voice Mail and the Brother machine will conflict with each other when receiving incoming calls.
(See Voice Mail on page 42 for instructions on setting up your machine using this service.)
Will you be using a Telephone Answering Device on the same telephone line as your Brother
machine?
Your external telephone answering device (TAD) will automatically answer every call. Voice messages are
stored on the external TAD and fax messages are printed. Choose External TAD as your Receive Mode.
(See Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device) on page 45.)
Will you be using your Brother machine on a dedicated fax line?
Your machine automatically answers every call as a fax. Choose Fax Only as your Receive Mode.
(See Fax Only on page 37.)
Will you be using your Brother machine on the same line as your telephone?
Do you want to receive voice calls and faxes automatically?
The Fax/Tel Receive Mode is used when sharing the Brother machine and your telephone on the
same line. Choose Fax/Tel as your Receive Mode. (See Fax/Tel on page 37.)
Important Note: You cannot receive voice messages on either Voice Mail or an answering machine
with the Fax/Tel mode.
Do you expect to receive very few faxes?
Choose Manual as your Receive Mode. You control the telephone line and must answer every call
yourself. (See Manual on page 37.)
35
5
Chapter 5
To set the Receive Mode follow the instructions below:
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
36
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Initial Setup.
Press Initial Setup.
Press a or b to display Receive Mode.
Press Receive Mode.
Press Fax Only, Fax/Tel, External TAD or Manual.
Press Stop/Exit.
The LCD will display the current Receive Mode.
Receiving a fax
Using Receive Modes
5
External TAD
5
External TAD mode lets an external
answering device manage your incoming
calls. Incoming calls will be handled in one of
the following ways:
Some Receive Modes answer automatically
(Fax Only and Fax/Tel). You may want to
change the Ring Delay before using these
modes. (See Ring Delay on page 38.)
 Faxes will be automatically received.
Fax Only
5
Fax Only mode will automatically answer
every call as a fax call.
Fax/Tel
 Voice callers can record a message on the
external TAD.
(For more information see Connecting an
external TAD (telephone answering device)
on page 45.)
5
Fax/Tel mode helps you automatically
manage incoming calls, by recognizing
whether they are fax or voice calls and
handling them in one of the following ways:
 Faxes will be automatically received.
 Voice calls will start the F/T Ring to tell you
to pick up the line. The F/T Ring is a fast
pseudo/double-ring made by your
machine.
(Also see F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)
on page 38 and Ring Delay on page 38.)
Manual
5
Manual mode turns off all automatic
answering functions unless you are using the
Distinctive Ring feature.
To receive a fax in Manual mode lift the
handset of the external telephone or press
Hook. When you hear fax tones (short
repeating beeps), press Black Start or
Color Start and choose Receive. You can
also use the Easy Receive feature to receive
faxes by lifting a handset on the same line as
the machine.
(Also see Easy Receive on page 39.)
37
5
Chapter 5
Receive Mode settings
Ring Delay
The Ring Delay sets the number of times the
machine rings before it answers in Fax Only
or Fax/Tel mode. If you have external or
extension telephones on the same line as the
machine, keep the Ring Delay setting of
4 rings.
(See Using external and extension
telephones on page 47 and Easy Receive
on page 39.)
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.
Press a or b to display Ring Delay.
Press Ring Delay.
Press the number of times the machine
will ring before it answers (0, 1, 2, 3 or
4).
If you choose 0, the machine will answer
immediately and the line will not ring at
all.
Press Stop/Exit.
5
5
F/T Ring Time
(Fax/Tel mode only)
When somebody calls your machine, you and
your caller will hear the normal telephone
ring. The number of rings is set by the Ring
Delay setting.
If the call is a fax, then your machine will
receive it; however, if it is a voice call the
machine will sound the F/T Ring (a fast
pseudo/double-ring) for the time you have set
in the F/T Ring Time setting. If you hear the
F/T Ring it means that you have a voice caller
on the line.
Because the F/T Ring is made by the
machine, extension and external telephones
will not ring; however, you can still answer the
call on any telephone. (For more information
see Using remote codes on page 48.)
a
b
c
d
e
f
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.
Press a or b to display
F/T Ring Time.
g
h
Press F/T Ring Time.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
Press how long the machine will ring to
alert you that you have a voice call (20,
30, 40 or 70 seconds).
Note
Even if the caller hangs up during the
pseudo/double-ringing, the machine will
continue to ring for the set time.
38
5
Receiving a fax
Easy Receive
If Easy Receive is On:
5
How to preview a received fax
5
If you answered at an extension telephone
press l 5 1. (See Using external and
extension telephones on page 47.)
Setting Fax Preview
• If this feature is set to On, but your
machine does not connect a fax call when
you lift an extension or external telephone,
press the fax receive code l 5 1.
• If you send faxes from a computer on the
same telephone line and the machine
intercepts them, set Easy Receive to Off.
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
5
a
Press Fax Preview.
The LCD will ask you if you want to turn
on Fax Preview.
b
Press Yes.
The LCD asks you again to confirm
because faxes will be viewed instead of
being automatically printed.
Press Yes.
c
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
e
f
g
h
i
5
You can view received faxes on the LCD by
pressing the Fax Preview key. When the
machine is in Ready mode, a popup message
will appear on the LCD to alert you of new
faxes.
If you are at the machine and answered a call
first by lifting the external handset, press
Black Start or Color Start, and then press
Receive to receive.
a
b
c
d
5
5
The machine can receive a fax automatically,
even if you answer the call. When you see
Receiving on the LCD or hear a click on the
phone line through the handset you are
using, just replace the handset. Your
machine will do the rest.
If Easy Receive is Off:
Fax Preview
(Black & White only)
Note
• When Fax Preview is turned on, a backup
copy of received faxes will not be printed
for Fax Forwarding and PC-Fax Receiving
operations, even if you have set Backup
Print to On.
• Fax Preview is not available when Fax
Forwarding is turned on.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.
Press a or b to display Easy Receive.
Press Easy Receive.
Press On (or Off).
Press Stop/Exit.
39
5
Chapter 5
Using Fax Preview
When the fax is displayed, the following
buttons will appear on the LCD and you
can perform the operations shown
below.
5
When you receive a fax, you will see the popup message on the LCD. (For example:
New Fax(es): 02)
a
Press Fax Preview.
You can see the new fax list.
Button
Enlarge the fax.
Note
Reduce the fax.
• If you receive a fax containing multiple
paper sizes (for example, a Letter size
page and a Ledger size page), the
machine may create and store a file for
each paper size. The LCD may show that
more than one fax job has been received.
c
Scroll vertically.
or
Scroll horizontally.
Delete the fax.
Press Yes to confirm.
Go back to the previous page.
Go to the next page.
Go back to the fax list.
Press a or b to display the fax number of
the fax you want to see.
Print the fax.
Do one of the following:
Press the fax you want to see.
 Press Print All Pages
to print the whole message.
Note
 Press
Print Displayed Only
to print only the displayed
page.
• If your fax is large there may be a delay
before it is displayed on the LCD.
• The LCD will show the current page
number and total pages of the fax
message. When your fax message is over
99 pages the total number of pages will be
shown as "XX."
 Press
Print From Displayed
to print from the displayed
page to the last page.
Close the preview table.
d
40
or
Rotate the fax clockwise.
• You can also see your old fax list by
pressing the Old Fax tab on the
Touchscreen. Press the New Fax tab to
go back to your new fax list.
b
Description
Press Stop/Exit.
Receiving a fax
How to print a fax
a
b
c
5
Press Fax Preview.
a
b
c
d
e
Press the fax you want to view.
Press
(Print).
 If the fax is multiple pages, go to
step d.
 If the fax is a single page it will start
printing. Go to step e.
d
Turning off Fax Preview
Do one of the following:
Press Fax Preview.
Press More.
Press Turn Off Fax Preview.
Press Yes to confirm.
If there are faxes stored in the memory,
do one of the following:
 To turn off Fax Preview without
printing your stored faxes, press
Continue.
Press Yes to confirm your faxes will
be deleted.
 Press Print All Pages to print
all pages of the fax.
 Press Print Displayed Only to
print the displayed page.
 If you want to print all the stored
faxes, press Print all faxes.
 Press Print From Displayed to
print the displayed page to the last
page.
e
5
 If you do not wish to turn off Fax
Preview, press Cancel.
Do one of the following:
f
 To delete the fax, press Yes.
Press Stop/Exit.
 To keep the fax in the memory, press
No.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
How to print all faxes in the list
a
b
c
d
Press Fax Preview.
Press More.
Press Print All.
Press Stop/Exit.
How to delete all faxes in the list
a
b
c
d
5
5
Press Fax Preview.
Press More.
Press Delete All.
Press Yes to confirm.
Press Stop/Exit.
41
5
6
Telephone services and external
devices
Telephone services
6
Your machine supports the Caller ID and
Distinctive Ring subscriber telephone
services that some telephone companies
offer.
Features like Voice Mail, Call Waiting, Call
Waiting/Caller ID, RingMaster, answering
services, alarm systems or other custom
features on one telephone line may create
problems with the operation of your machine.
If you have Voice Mail on your telephone line,
please read the following carefully.
Voice Mail
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone
line as your Brother machine, Voice Mail and
the Brother machine will conflict with each
other when receiving incoming calls.
For example, if your Voice Mail is set to
answer after 4 rings and your Brother
machine is set to answer after 2 rings, then
your Brother machine will answer first. This
will prevent callers from being able to leave a
message in your Voice Mail.
Similarly, if your Brother machine is set to
answer after 4 rings and your Voice Mail is set
to answer after 2 rings, then your Voice Mail
will answer first. This will prevent your Brother
machine from being able to receive an
incoming fax, since Voice Mail cannot
transfer the incoming fax back to the Brother
machine.
42
6
To avoid conflicts between your Brother
machine and your Voice Mail service, do one
of the following:
Get the Distinctive Ring service from your
telephone company. Distinctive Ring is a
feature of your Brother machine that allows a
person with one line to receive fax and voice
calls through two different phone numbers on
that one line.
Brother uses the term “Distinctive Ring,” but
telephone companies market the service
under a variety of names, such as Custom
Ringing, Personalized Ring, Smart Ring,
RingMaster, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call, Data
Ident-A-Call, Teen Ring, and SimpleBiz Fax
& Alternate Number Ringing. This service
establishes a second telephone number on
the same line as your existing telephone
number, and each number has its own ring
pattern. Typically, the original number rings
with the standard ring pattern and is used for
receiving voice calls, and the second number
rings with a different ring pattern and is used
for receiving faxes. (See Distinctive Ring
on page 43.)
OR
Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to
“Manual.” Manual Mode requires that you
answer every incoming call if you want to be
able to receive a fax. If the incoming call is a
telephone call, then complete the call as you
normally would. If you hear fax-sending tones
you must transfer the call to the Brother
machine. (See Using external and extension
telephones on page 47.) Unanswered fax
and voice calls will go to your Voice Mail. (To
set the machine in MANUAL Mode, see
Choose the correct Receive Mode
on page 35.)
6
Telephone services and external devices
Distinctive Ring
6
Do you have Voice Mail?
If you have Voice Mail on the telephone line
that you will install your new machine on,
there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail
and the machine will conflict with each other
while receiving incoming calls. However, the
Distinctive Ring feature allows you to use
more than one number on your line, so
both Voice Mail and the machine can work
together without any problems. If each one
has a separate telephone number, neither will
interfere with the other's operations.
Distinctive Ring is a function of your Brother
machine that allows a person with one line to
receive fax and voice calls through two
different phone numbers on that one line.
Brother uses the term “Distinctive Ring,” but
telephone companies market the service
under a variety of names, such as Smart
Ring, Ring Master or Ident-a-Ring. This
service establishes a second telephone
number on the same line as your existing
telephone number, and each number has its
own ring pattern. Typically, the original
number rings with the standard ring pattern
and is used for receiving voice calls, and the
second number rings with a different ring
pattern and is used for receiving faxes.
If you decide to get the Distinctive Ring
service from the telephone company, you will
need to follow the directions on next page to
“register” the new Distinctive Ring pattern
they give you. This is so your machine can
recognize its incoming calls.
Note
You can change or cancel the Distinctive
Ring pattern at any time. You can switch it
off temporarily, and turn it back on later.
When you get a new fax number, make
sure you reset this feature.
• Please call your telephone company for
availability and rates.
6
Your telephone company's Distinctive Ring
service allows you to have more than one
number on the same telephone line. If you
need more than one telephone number, it
is cheaper than paying for an extra line.
Each telephone number has its own
distinctive ring pattern, so you will know
which telephone number is ringing. This is
one way you can have a separate telephone
number for your machine.
What does Brother's “Distinctive
Ring” do?
The Brother machine has a Distinctive Ring
feature that allows you to use your machine to
take full advantage of the telephone
company's Distinctive Ring service. The new
telephone number on your line can just
receive faxes.
6
Note
• You must pay for your telephone
company's Distinctive Ring service before
you program the machine to work with it.
What does your telephone company's
“Distinctive Ring” do?
6
Before you choose the ring pattern to
register
6
You can only register one Distinctive Ring
pattern with the machine. Some ring patterns
cannot be registered. The ring patterns below
are supported by your Brother machine.
Register the one your telephone company
gives you.
6
Ring
Pattern
Rings
1
long-long
2
short-long-short
3
short-short-long
4
very long
(normal pattern)
43
Chapter 6
Note
Ring Pattern #1 is often called Short-Short
and is the most commonly used.
If the ring pattern you received is not on
this chart, please call your telephone
company and ask for one that is
shown.
f
g
h
i
Press a or b to display Distinctive.
j
Press Stop/Exit.
Distinctive Ring is now set to On.
 The machine will only answer calls to its
registered number.
 The first two rings are silent on the
machine. This is because the fax must
“listen” to the ring pattern (to compare it to
the pattern that was “registered”). (Other
telephones on the same line will ring.)
Very Important !
After you have set the Distinctive Ring feature
to On, your Distinctive Ring number will
receive faxes automatically. The Receive
Mode is automatically set to Manual and you
cannot change it to another Receive Mode
while Distinctive Ring is set to On. This
ensures the Brother machine will only answer
the Distinctive Ring number and will not
interfere when your main telephone number
is called. When Distinctive Ring is on, the
LCD will show D/R as the Receive Mode.
a
b
c
d
e
44
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Miscellaneous.
Press Miscellaneous.
Press Set.
Press the stored ring pattern you want to
use.
Press OK.
(You will hear each pattern as you scroll
through the four patterns. Make sure
you choose the pattern that the
telephone company gave you.)
Turning off Distinctive Ring
 If you program the machine properly, it will
recognize the registered ring pattern of the
“fax number” within 2 ring patterns and
then answer with a fax tones. When the
“voice number” is called, the machine will
not answer.
Registering the Distinctive Ring
pattern
Press Distinctive.
a
b
c
d
6
e
f
g
h
i
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Miscellaneous.
Press Miscellaneous.
Press a or b to display Distinctive.
Press Distinctive.
Press Off.
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
If you turn off Distinctive Ring, the
machine will stay in Manual mode. You
will need to set the Receive Mode again.
(See Choose the correct Receive Mode
on page 35.)
6
Telephone services and external devices
Connecting an external
TAD (telephone
answering device)
• If You Do Not Subscribe to the
Distinctive Ring Service:
You must plug your TAD into the EXT.
jack of your machine. If your TAD is
plugged into a wall jack, both your
machine and the TAD will try to control the
telephone line. (See the illustration
below.)
6
You may choose to connect an external
answering device. However, when you have
an external TAD on the same telephone line
as the machine, the TAD answers all calls
and the machine “listens” for fax calling
(CNG) tones. If it hears them, the machine
takes over the call and receives the fax. If it
does not hear CNG tones, the machine lets
the TAD continue playing your outgoing
message so your caller can leave you a voice
message.
The TAD must answer within four rings (the
recommended setting is two rings). The
machine cannot hear CNG tones until the
TAD has answered the call, and with four
rings there are only 8 to 10 seconds of CNG
tones left for the fax “handshake.” Make sure
you carefully follow the instructions in this
guide for recording your outgoing message.
We do not recommend using the toll saver
feature on your external answering machine if
it exceeds five rings.
Note
• If you do not receive all your faxes,
shorten the Ring Delay setting on your
external TAD.
• If You Subscribe to your Telephone
company's Distinctive Ring Service:
• Before you connect the external TAD,
remove the protective cap (2) from the
EXT. jack on the machine.
1
6
1
2
1
TAD
2
Protective Cap
When the TAD answers a call, the LCD
shows Telephone.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT connect a TAD elsewhere on the
same telephone line.
You may connect an external TAD to a
separate wall jack only if you subscribe to
your telephone company's Distinctive
Ring service, have registered the
distinctive ring pattern on your machine,
and use that number as a fax number. The
recommended setting is at least four rings
on the external TAD when you have the
telephone company's Distinctive Ring
service. You cannot use the Toll Saver
setting.
45
Chapter 6
Connections
The external TAD must be plugged into the
jack labeled EXT. Your machine cannot work
properly if you plug the TAD into a wall jack
(unless you are using Distinctive Ring).
a
b
Plug the telephone line cord from the
telephone wall jack into the jack labeled
LINE.
Remove the protective cap (1) from the
jack labeled EXT., and then plug the
telephone line cord from the external
TAD into the EXT. jack. (Make sure this
cord is connected to the TAD at the
TAD's telephone line jack, and not its
handset jack.)
6
Recording an outgoing
message (OGM) on an
external TAD
6
Timing is important in recording this message.
The message sets up the ways to handle both
manual and automatic fax reception.
a
Record 5 seconds of silence at the
beginning of your message. (This allows
your machine time to listen for the fax
CNG tones of automatic transmissions
before they stop.)
b
c
Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
End your 20-second message by giving
your Fax Receive Code for people
sending manual faxes. For example:
“After the beep, leave a message or
send a fax by pressing l 5 1 and Start.”
Note
1
c
Multi-line connections (PBX)
Set your external TAD to four rings or
less. (The machine's Ring Delay setting
does not apply.)
d
Record the outgoing message on your
external TAD.
e
f
Set the TAD to answer calls.
46
We recommend beginning your OGM with
an initial 5-second silence because the
machine cannot hear fax tones over a
resonant or loud voice. You may try
omitting this pause, but if your machine
has trouble receiving, then you must
re-record the OGM to include it.
Set the Receive Mode to
External TAD. (See Choose the
correct Receive Mode on page 35.)
We suggest you ask the company who
installed your PBX to connect your machine.
If you have a multi-line system we suggest
you ask the installer to connect the unit to the
last line on the system. This prevents the
machine being activated each time the
system receives telephone calls. If all
incoming calls will be answered by a
switchboard operator we recommend that
you set the Receive Mode to Manual.
We cannot guarantee that your machine will
operate properly under all circumstances
when connected to a PBX. Any difficulties
with sending or receiving faxes should be
reported first to the company who handles
your PBX.
6
Telephone services and external devices
External and extension
telephones
Using external and extension
telephones
6
6
Using extension telephones
Connecting an external or
extension telephone
6
You can connect a separate telephone to
your machine as shown in the diagram below.
Connect the telephone line cord to the jack
labeled EXT.
Before you connect the external telephone,
remove the protective cap (3) from the EXT.
jack on the machine.
1
2
If you answer a fax call at an extension
telephone, you can make your machine
receive the fax by pressing the Fax Receive
Code l 5 1.
If the machine answers a voice call and
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you
can take the call at an extension telephone by
pressing the Telephone Answer Code # 5 1.
(See F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)
on page 38.)
Using an external telephone
(connected to the EXT. jack of the
machine)
6
If you answer a fax call at the external
telephone connected to the EXT. jack of the
machine, you can make the machine receive
the fax by pressing Black Start and choosing
Receive.
You can also use the Fax Receive Code
l 5 1.
3
1
Extension telephone
2
External telephone
3
Protective Cap
When you are using a telephone on the same
phone line, the LCD shows Telephone.
If the machine answers a voice call and
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you
can take the call at the external telephone by
pressing Hook.
If you answer a call and no one is on
the line:
6
You should assume that you're receiving a
manual fax.
Press l 5 1 and wait for the chirp or until the
LCD shows Receiving, and then hang up.
Note
You can also use the Easy Receive
feature to make your machine
automatically take the call. (See Easy
Receive on page 39.)
47
Chapter 6
Using a non-Brother cordless
external telephone
Changing the remote codes
6
If your non-Brother cordless telephone is
connected to the EXT. jack of the machine
and you typically carry the cordless handset
elsewhere, it is easier to answer calls during
the Ring Delay.
If you let the machine answer first, you will
have to go to the machine so you can press
Hook to send the call to the cordless handset.
Using remote codes
Fax Receive Code
6
6
If you answer a fax call on an extension
telephone, you can tell your machine to
receive it by dialing the Fax Receive Code
l 5 1. Wait for the chirping sounds and then
replace the handset. (See Easy Receive
on page 39.)
The preset Fax Receive Code is l 5 1. The
preset Telephone Answer Code is # 5 1. If
you want to, you can replace them with your
own codes.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
If you receive a voice call and the machine is
in Fax/Tel mode, it will start to sound the F/T
(pseudo/double) ring after the initial Ring
Delay. If you pick up the call on an extension
telephone you can turn the F/T Ring off by
pressing # 5 1 (make sure you press this
between the rings).
If the machine answers a voice call and
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you
can take the call at the external telephone
connected to the EXT. jack of the machine by
pressing Hook.
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.
Press a or b to display Remote Codes.
Press Remote Codes.
Press On (or Off).
Do one of the following.
 If you want to change the Fax
Receive Code, enter the new code.
If you answer a fax call at the external
telephone connected to the EXT. jack of the
machine, you can make the machine receive
the fax by pressing Black Start and choosing
Receive.
Telephone Answer Code
Press OK. Go to step j.
 If you do not want to change the Fax
Receive Code, press OK. Go to
step j.
j
Do one of the following.
6
 If you want to change the Telephone
Answer Code, enter the new code.
Press OK. Go to step k.
 If you do not want to change the
Telephone Answer Code, press OK.
Go to step k.
k
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
• If you are always disconnected when
accessing your external TAD remotely, try
changing the Fax Receive Code and
Telephone Answer Code to another threedigit code (such as # # # and 9 9 9).
• Remote Codes might not work with some
telephone systems.
48
6
7
Dialing and storing numbers
How to dial
Manual dialing
7
Speed Dialing
7
a
Press
7
7
(Phone Book).
Or, you can press
(FAX) and
then press Phone Book.
Press all of the digits of the fax or telephone
number.
b
Press the 2-digit number you want to
call. You can also display the numbers
in alphabetical order by pressing
on LCD.
Note
If the LCD shows Not Registered
when you enter a Speed Dial number that
has not been stored at this location.
One Touch Dialing
Your machine has 8 One Touch keys where
you can store 16 fax or telephone numbers
for automatic dialing.
c
To send a fax, press Send a fax and
go to step d.
The machine dials the telephone
number.
d
Press Black Start or Color Start.
The machine scans and sends the fax.
7
Press the One Touch key that stores the
number you want to call. (See Storing
One Touch Dial numbers on page 50.) To
access numbers 9 to 16, hold down Shift as
you press the One Touch key.
49
7
Chapter 7
Fax Redial
If you are sending a fax manually and the line
is busy, press Redial/Pause, and then press
Black Start or Color Start to try again. If you
want to make a second call to a number you
recently dialed, you can press Redial/Pause
and choose one of the last 30 numbers from
the Outgoing Call List.
Redial/Pause only works if you dialed from
the control panel. If you are sending a fax
automatically and the line is busy, the
machine will automatically redial once after
five minutes.
a
b
c
d
Press Redial/Pause.
Press the number you want to redial.
Press Send a fax.
Press Black Start or Color Start.
Note
In Real Time Transmission the automatic
redial feature does not work when you are
using the scanner glass.
50
7
Storing numbers
7
You can set up your machine to do the
following types of easy dialing: One Touch,
Speed Dial and Groups for broadcasting
faxes. When you dial a Quick Dial number,
the LCD shows the number.
Note
If you lose electrical power, the Quick Dial
numbers that are in the memory will not be
lost.
Storing a pause
7
When you are storing One Touch or
Speed Dial numbers in the Phone Book, you
can insert one or more 3.5-second pauses by
pressing the Pause button on the
Touchscreen.
Storing One Touch Dial
numbers
Your machine has 8 One Touch keys where
you can store 16 fax or telephone numbers
for automatic dialing. To access numbers
9 to 16 hold down Shift as you press the
One Touch key.
7
Dialing and storing numbers
a
Do one of the following:
 Press the One Touch key where you
want to store the number. If a
number is not stored there, the LCD
shows Not Registered
Register Now?
Press Yes.
 Press
(Phone Book), More,
and Set One Touch Dial.
Then, enter the One Touch number
where you want to store the number.
Press OK.
b
Do one of the following:
 Enter the name (up to 16 characters)
by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Storing Speed Dial numbers
Names and numbers can be stored in 2-digit
Speed Dial locations. You can store up to
100 different Speed Dial numbers. When you
dial you will only have to press a few buttons
on the Touchscreen (for example: press
(Phone Book), the number you want
to call and Send a fax).
a
Press
b
c
d
Press More.
(To help you enter letters, see
Entering Text on page 130.)
 To store the number without a name,
press OK.
e
If you downloaded Internet Fax:
server, press
and enter the E-mail
address and press OK. (See Entering Text
on page 130.)
d
e
When the LCD shows your settings,
press OK to confirm.
Press Stop/Exit.
Do one of the following:
(To help you enter letters, see
Entering Text on page 130.)
Note
If you want to store an E-mail address to
use with Internet fax or Scan to E-mail
Press Set Speed Dial.
Press OK.
 To store the number without a name,
press OK.
Enter the fax or telephone number (up to
20 digits) by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
(Phone Book).
 Enter the name (up to 16 characters)
by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
c
7
Enter the first fax or telephone number
(Fax/Tel1:) by pressing the buttons
on the Touchscreen (up to 20 digits).
Press OK.
Note
If you want to store an E-mail address to
use with Internet fax or Scan to E-mail
server, press
and enter the E-mail
address and press OK. (See Entering Text
on page 130.)
f
Do one of the following:
 Enter the second fax or telephone
number (Fax/Tel2:) by pressing
the buttons on the Touchscreen (up
to 20 digits).
Press OK.
 If you do not want to store a second
number, press OK.
51
7
Chapter 7
g
To choose where the number will be
stored, do one of the following:
 To accept the displayed next
available Speed Dial location, press
OK.
 To enter a different Speed Dial
location, press the 2-digit number
using the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Note
Changing One Touch or
Speed Dial names or numbers
You can change or delete a One Touch or
Speed Dial name or number that has already
been stored.
a
Press
b
c
Press More.
i
(Phone Book).
Do one of the following:
 Press Change to edit the names or
numbers.
If the 2-digit Speed Dial location you
choose is already taken, the OK button on
the LCD will not work. Choose a different
location.
h
 Press Delete to delete all
information in a Speed Dial or One
Touch location.
When the LCD shows your settings,
press OK to confirm.
Press the number you want to delete.
Do one of the following:
Press Yes to confirm.
 To store another Speed Dial
number, repeat steps b to h.
 To finish storing numbers, press
Stop/Exit.
Press OK.
Go to step h.
d
Press a or b to display the number you
want to change.
e
Press the number you want to change.
Note
One Touch Dial locations begin with l.
Speed Dial locations begin with #.
52
7
Dialing and storing numbers
f
Do one of the following:
 If you want to change the name,
press Name:
Enter the new name (up to 16
characters) by pressing the buttons
on the Touchscreen. (See Entering
Text on page 130.)
Press OK.
 If you want to change the first
Fax/Tel number, press Fax/Tel:
(One Touch Dial) or Fax/Tel1:
(Speed Dial).
Enter the new fax or telephone
number (up to 20 digits) by pressing
the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
 If you want to change the second
Fax/Tel number, press Fax/Tel2:
(Speed Dial).
7
Enter the new fax or telephone
number (up to 20 digits) by pressing
the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Note
How to change the stored name or
number:
If you want to change a character, press
d or c to position the cursor under the
character you want to change, and then
press
. Re-enter the character.
g
Do one of the following:
 Press OK to finish.
To change another One Touch or
Speed Dial number, repeat steps b
to f.
 To change more details, go to f.
The LCD will display your settings.
h
Press Stop/Exit.
53
8
Making copies
8
b
How to copy
8
Do one of the following to load your
document:
The following steps show the basic copy
operation. For details about each option, see
the Advanced User’s Guide.
 Place the document face up in the
ADF.
a
 Place the document face down on
the scanner glass.
(See Using the ADF on page 28.)
When you want to make a copy, press
(COPY) to illuminate it in blue.
(See Using the scanner glass
on page 29.)
 Make sure you are in COPY mode.
1
No. of Copies
Press the number box (1) and enter the
number of copies you want.
Also you can enter the number of copies
by pressing
or
on the
screen (as shown above) or by using the
dial pad.
Note
The default setting is FAX mode. You can
change the amount of time that the
machine stays in COPY mode after the
last copy operation. (See Mode Timer in
chapter 1 of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
54
If you want more than one copy, enter
the number (up to 99).
d
Press Black Start or Color Start.
Stop copying
 The LCD shows:
1
c
To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.
8
Making copies
Copy settings
You can change the following copy settings.
Press COPY and then press d or c to scroll
through the copy settings. When the setting
you want is displayed, press it and choose
your option.
(Basic User's Guide)
For details about changing the following copy
settings, see page 55.
 Paper Type
 Paper Size
 Tray Select
(Advanced User’s Guide)
For details about changing the following copy
settings, see chapter 7:
8
Paper Options
Paper Type
 Page Layout
a
Press
b
c
d
e
f
Load your document.
g
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
 2 in 1 (ID)
 Stack/Sort
 Density
 Ink Save Mode
 Thin Paper Copy
 Skew Adjustment
 Book Copy
 Watermark Copy
 Duplex Copy
 Favorite Settings
Note
If you want to sort copies, use the ADF.
8
If you are copying on special paper, set the
machine for the type of paper you are using to
get the best print quality.
 Quality
 Enlarge/Reduce
8
(COPY).
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Paper Type.
Press Paper Type.
Press Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper,
Brother BP71, Brother BP61,
Other Glossy or Transparency.
Paper Size
8
8
If you are copying on paper other than Letter
size, you will need to change the Paper Size
setting. You can copy only on Letter, Legal,
Ledger, A4, A5, A3, Executive or Photo
4"  6" (10  15 cm) paper.
a
Press
b
c
d
e
f
Load your document.
g
(COPY).
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Paper Size.
Press Paper Size.
Press Letter, Legal, Ledger, A4,
A5, A3, EXE or 4"x6".
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
55
Chapter 8
Tray Select
8
You can temporarily change the tray for the
next copy. To change the default tray setting
see Tray use in COPY mode on page 22.
a
Press
b
c
d
e
f
Load your document.
g
(COPY).
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Tray Select.
Press Tray Select.
Press Tray#1, Tray#2 or
Auto Select.
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
Note
Poster copy is not available when you use
Tray #2.
56
9
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing
photos from a memory card or
USB Flash memory drive
PhotoCapture Center™
operations
9
9
Even if your machine is not connected to your
computer, you can print photos directly from
digital camera media or a USB Flash memory
drive. (See Print Images on page 60.)
You can scan documents and save them
directly to a memory card or USB Flash
memory drive. (See How to scan to a memory
card or USB Flash memory drive
on page 61.)
If your machine is connected to a computer,
you can access a memory card or USB Flash
memory drive that is inserted in the front of
the machine from your computer.
(See PhotoCapture Center™ for Windows® or
Remote Setup & PhotoCapture Center™ for
Macintosh in the Software User’s Guide.)
Using a memory card or USB
Flash memory drive
9
9
Your Brother machine has media drives
(slots) for use with the following popular
digital camera media: Memory Stick™,
Memory Stick PRO™, Memory Stick Duo™,
Memory Stick PRO Duo™, SD, SDHC,
MultiMedia Card, MultiMedia Card plus and
USB Flash memory drives.
The PhotoCapture Center™ feature lets you
print digital photos from your digital camera at
high resolution to get photo quality printing.
57
Chapter 9
Getting started
9
Firmly put a memory card or USB Flash memory drive into the proper slot.
1
2
1 USB Flash memory drive
IMPORTANT
The USB direct interface supports only a USB Flash
memory drive, a PictBridge-compatible camera, or a
digital camera that uses the USB mass storage standard.
Any other USB devices are not supported.
2 Memory card slot
Slot
Upper slot
Compatible memory cards
Memory Stick™
Memory Stick PRO™
Memory Stick Duo™
Memory Stick PRO Duo™
Memory Stick Micro™
(Adapter required)
Lower slot
SD
SDHC
MultiMedia Card
MultiMedia Card plus
mini SD (Adapter required)
micro SD (Adapter required)
micro SDHC (Adapter required)
MultiMedia Card mobile
(Adapter required)
58
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
IMPORTANT
DO NOT insert a Memory Stick Duo™ into the lower SD slot. Doing this may cause damage
to the machine.
PHOTO CAPTURE key lights:
 PHOTO CAPTURE light is on, the memory card or USB Flash memory drive is properly
inserted.
 PHOTO CAPTURE light is off, the memory card or USB Flash memory drive is not properly
inserted.
 PHOTO CAPTURE light is blinking, the memory card or USB Flash memory drive is being read
or written to.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT unplug the power cord or remove the memory card or USB Flash memory drive from
the media drive (slot) or USB direct interface while the machine is reading or writing to the
memory card or USB Flash memory drive (the PHOTO CAPTURE key is blinking). You will
lose your data or damage the card.
The machine can only read one memory card or USB Flash memory drive at a time.
59
9
Chapter 9
Print Images
View Photos
e
Repeat step c and d until you have
chosen all the photos that you want to
print.
f
After you have chosen all the photos,
press OK. You now have the following
options:
9
9
You can preview your photos on the LCD
before you print them. If your photos are large
files there may be a delay before each photo
is displayed on the LCD.
a
b
Press Yes to confirm.
Go to step f.
Note
• Four thumbnails are displayed at a time
with the current page number and total
number of pages listed under the
thumbnails.
• Press d or c repeatedly to scroll through
all photos. Hold down d or c to
fast-forward and fast-rewind through the
thumbnail pages.
• Press
to start Slide Show.
Press a photo from the thumbnail.
Enter the number of copies you want
either by pressing the number box and
entering the number of copies or by
pressing + or -.
Press OK.
.
(See Enhance Photos in chapter 8 of
the Advanced User’s Guide.)
 If you want to change the print
settings, press Print Setting.
(See page 61.)
Press View Photo(s).
Do one of the following:
 If you want to print all photos,
press
.
60
your chosen photos, press
Make sure you have put the memory
card or USB Flash memory drive in the
proper slot.
Press
(PHOTO CAPTURE).
 If you want to choose photos to print
or print more than one for an image,
go to step c.
c
d
 To add the Auto Correct effect to
 If you do not want to change any
settings, go to step g.
g
Press Color Start to print.
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
PhotoCapture Center™
print settings
You can change the print settings for the next
printing.
These settings are temporary, and the
machine returns to its default settings
3 minutes after printing, unless you have set
the Mode Timer to 2 minutes or less. (See
Mode Timer in chapter 1 of the Advanced
User’s Guide.)
Note
You can save the print settings you use
most often by setting them as the default.
(See Setting your changes as the new
default in chapter 8 of the Advanced
User’s Guide.)
9
How to scan to a
memory card or USB
Flash memory drive
9
You can scan black & white and color
documents into a memory card or USB Flash
memory drive. Black & white documents will
be stored in PDF (*.PDF) or TIFF (*.TIF) file
formats. Color documents may be stored in
PDF (*.PDF) or JPEG (*.JPG) file formats.
The factory setting is Color 200 dpi and
the default file format is PDF. The machine
automatically creates file names based on
the current date. (For details, see the Quick
Setup Guide.) For example, the fifth image
scanned on July 1, 2011 would be named
07011105.PDF. You can change the color
and quality.
Quality
Selectable File
Format
Color 100 dpi
JPEG / PDF
Color 200 dpi
JPEG / PDF
Color 300 dpi
JPEG / PDF
Color 600 dpi
JPEG / PDF
B/W 100 dpi
TIFF / PDF
B/W 200 dpi
TIFF / PDF
B/W 300 dpi
TIFF / PDF
a
9
Make sure you have put the memory
card or USB Flash memory drive in the
proper slot.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT take out the memory card or
USB Flash memory drive while
PHOTO CAPTURE is blinking to avoid
damaging the card, USB Flash memory
drive or the data stored on them.
61
Chapter 9
b
Do one of the following:
e
 If you want to scan a 2-sided
document, load your document in the
ADF.
Press Stop/Exit to return to Ready
mode.
Press Duplex, and then press Scan.
Go to step c.
 If you want to scan a single-sided
document, load your document and
press
(SCAN).
Go to step d.
c
 To change the file type, press d or c
to display File Type.
Press File Type and choose PDF,
JPEG or TIFF.
Do one of the following:
 If your document is flipped on the
long edge, press
DuplexScan :LongEdge.
Long edge
Portrait
Landscape
Do one of the following:
 To change the quality, press d or c to
display Quality.
Press Quality and choose
Color 100 dpi,
Color 200 dpi,
Color 300 dpi,
Color 600 dpi, B/W 100 dpi,
B/W 200 dpi or B/W 300 dpi.
Note
If you are using the scanner glass of the
machine you can change the glass scan
size.
Press d or c to display
Glass Scan Size and choose Letter,
Legal, Ledger, A3 or A4.
 If you want to change the file name,
press d or c to display File Name.
Press File Name and enter the file
name.
You can only change the first
6 characters.
Press OK.
 If your document is flipped on the
short edge, press
DuplexScan :ShortEdge.
 To start scanning without changing
additional settings, go to step f.
Note
Short edge
Portrait
Landscape
• If you chose color in the resolution setting,
you cannot choose TIFF.
• If you chose black & white in the resolution
setting, you cannot choose JPEG.
f
Press Black Start or Color Start.
Note
d
Press to Media.
• You can scan a 2-sided document up to
Legal size from the ADF.
• You can place multiple documents on the
scanner glass and scan them as separate
files. (See Auto Crop in chapter 8 of the
Advanced User’s Guide.)
62
10
How to print from a computer
Printing a document
10
10
The machine can receive data from your
computer and print it. To print from a
computer, install the printer driver.
(See Printing for Windows® or Printing and
Faxing for Macintosh in the Software User’s
Guide for details about the print settings.)
a
Install the Brother printer driver on the
Installation CD-ROM. (See the Quick
Setup Guide.)
b
From your application, choose the Print
command.
c
Choose the name of your machine in the
Print dialog box and click Properties.
d
Choose the settings you want in the
Properties dialog box.
 Media Type
 Print Quality
10
 Paper Size
 Orientation
 Color/Grayscale
 Ink Save Mode
 Scaling
e
f
Click OK.
Click OK to begin printing.
63
11
How to scan to a computer
Scanning a document
11
There are several ways to scan documents.
You can use the SCAN key on the machine or
the scanner drivers on your computer.
a
To use the machine as a scanner, install
a scanner driver. If the machine is on a
Network, configure it with a TCP/IP
address.
Scanning using the
SCAN key
a
Press
b
Choose the SCAN mode you want.
 to Media
 to Network
 to FTP
 to Email
 to OCR 1
 to Image
1
Load your document. (See How to load
documents on page 28.)
(Macintosh users)
This function is available after you download
and install Presto! PageManager from
http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/
PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
 Use the ADF to scan multiple pages
of documents or 2-sided documents.
It feeds each sheet automatically.
c
 Use the scanner glass to scan a
page of a book or one sheet at a
time.
(For network users)
Choose the computer you want to send
the data to.
d
Press Start to begin scanning.
Do one of the following:
 To scan using the SCAN key, go to
Scanning using the SCAN key.
 To scan using a scanner driver at
your computer, go to Scanning using
a scanner driver.
64
(SCAN).
 to File
 Configure the machine with a TCP/IP
address if network scanning does not
work. (See Configuring Network
Scanning in the Software User’s
Guide.)
c
11
For more information, see Using the Scan
key in the Software User’s Guide.
 Install the scanner drivers on the
Installation CD-ROM. (See the Quick
Setup Guide and Scanning in the
Software User’s Guide.)
b
11
Scanning using a
scanner driver
11
For more information, see Scanning a
document using the TWAIN driver or
Scanning a document using the WIA driver in
the Software User’s Guide.
a
Start a scanning application and click
the Scan button.
b
Adjust the settings such as Resolution,
Brightness and Scan Type in the
Scanner Setup dialog box.
c
Click Start or Scan to begin scanning.
A
Routine maintenance
Replacing the ink
cartridges
Your machine is equipped with an ink dot
counter. The ink dot counter automatically
monitors the level of ink in each of the
four cartridges. When the machine detects an
ink cartridge is running out of ink, the machine
will tell you with a message on the LCD.
A
a
Open the ink cartridge cover.
If one or more of the ink cartridges have
reached the end of their life, the LCD
shows B&W Print Only or
Cannot Print.
b
Press the lock release lever as shown to
release the cartridge for the color
indicated on the LCD. Remove the
cartridge from the machine.
A
The LCD will tell you which ink cartridge is low
or needs replacing. Be sure to follow the LCD
prompts to replace the ink cartridges in the
correct order.
Even though the machine tells you to replace
an ink cartridge, there will be a small amount
of ink left in the ink cartridge. It is necessary
to keep some ink in the ink cartridge to
prevent air from drying out and damaging the
print head assembly.
IMPORTANT
Brother strongly recommends that you do
not refill the ink cartridges provided with
your machine. We also strongly
recommend that you continue to use only
Genuine Brother Brand replacement ink
cartridges. Use or attempted use of
potentially incompatible ink and/or
cartridges in the Brother machine may
cause damage to the machine and/or may
result in unsatisfactory print quality. Our
warranty coverage does not apply to any
problem that is caused by the use of
unauthorized third-party ink and/or
cartridges. To protect your investment and
obtain premium performance from the
Brother machine, we strongly recommend
the use of Genuine Brother Supplies.
A
c
Open the new ink cartridge bag for the
color shown on the LCD, and then take
out the ink cartridge.
65
d
Turn the green release lever on the
orange protective packing (1) clockwise
until it clicks to release the vacuum seal.
Then remove the orange protective
packing as shown.
f
Gently push the back of the ink cartridge
marked “PUSH” until it clicks, and then
close the ink cartridge cover.
g
The machine will automatically reset the
ink dot counter.
1
Note
1
e
Each color has its own correct position.
Insert the ink cartridge in the direction of
the arrow on the label.
• If you replaced an ink cartridge, for
example Black, the LCD may ask you to
verify that it was a brand new one (for
example, Did You Change
Black).
For each new cartridge you installed,
press Yes to automatically reset the ink
dot counter for that color. If the ink
cartridge you installed is not a brand new
one, be sure to press No.
• If the LCD shows No Ink Cartridge or
Cannot Detect after you install the ink
cartridges, check that the ink cartridges
are installed properly. Remove the ink
cartridge and reinstall it slowly until it
clicks.
CAUTION
If ink gets in your eyes, wash it out with
water at once and call a doctor if you are
concerned.
66
Routine maintenance
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT take out ink cartridges if you do
not need to replace them. If you do so, it
may reduce the ink quantity and the
machine will not know the quantity of ink
left in the cartridge.
• DO NOT touch the cartridge insertion
slots. If you do so, the ink may stain your
skin.
• If ink gets on your skin or clothing
immediately wash it off with soap or
detergent.
Cleaning and checking
the machine
Cleaning the scanner
A
a
Unplug the machine from the AC power
outlet.
b
Lift the document cover (1). Clean the
scanner glass (2) and the white
plastic (3) with a soft lint-free cloth
moistened with a non-flammable glass
cleaner.
• If you mix the colors by installing an ink
cartridge in the wrong position, clean the
print head several times after correcting
the cartridge installation.
A
1
• Once you open an ink cartridge, install it in
the machine and use it up within six
months of installation. Use unopened ink
cartridges by the expiration date written on
the cartridge package.
3
• DO NOT dismantle or tamper with the ink
cartridge; this can cause the ink to leak out
of the cartridge.
2
c
In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1)
and the glass strip (2) with a soft lint-free
cloth moistened with a non-flammable
glass cleaner.
1
2
67
A
d
Close the document cover and open the
ADF cover.
Clean the white bar (1) and the glass
strip (2) with a soft lint-free cloth
moistened with a non-flammable glass
cleaner.
Cleaning the print head
To maintain good print quality, the machine
will automatically clean the print head when
needed. You can start the cleaning process
manually if there is a print quality problem.
Clean the print head and ink cartridges if you
get a horizontal line in the text or graphics, or
blank text on your printed pages. You can
clean Black only, three colors at a time
(Yellow/Cyan/Magenta), or all four colors at
once.
1
Cleaning the print head consumes ink.
Cleaning too often uses ink unnecessarily.
IMPORTANT
2
e
f
Close the ADF cover.
Re-connect the power cord.
DO NOT touch the print head. Touching
the print head may cause permanent
damage and may void the print head's
warranty.
Note
In addition to cleaning the scanner glass
and glass strip with a non-flammable glass
cleaner, run your fingertip over the glass
to see if you can feel anything on it. If you
feel dirt or debris, clean the glass again
concentrating on that area. You may need
to repeat the cleaning process three or
four times. To test, make a copy after each
cleaning attempt.
a
Press
b
c
Press Cleaning.
.
Press Black, Color or All.
The machine cleans the print head.
When cleaning is finished, the machine
will go back to the Ready screen
automatically.
Note
i
When there is a
spot of dirt or
correction fluid
on the glass strip
the printed
sample shows a
vertical line.
68
After the glass
strip is cleaned
the vertical line is
gone.
If you clean the print head at least five
times and the print has not improved, try
installing a new Genuine Brother Brand
replacement ink cartridge for each
problem color. Try cleaning the print head
again up to five more times. If the print has
not improved call Brother Customer
Service. (See Brother numbers
on page i.)
A
Routine maintenance
Checking the print quality
If faded or streaked colors and text appear on
your printouts, some of the print head nozzles
may be clogged. You can check this by
printing the Print Quality Check Sheet and
looking at the nozzle check pattern.
a
Press
b
c
d
Press Test Print.
.
Press Print Quality.
Press Color Start.
The machine begins printing the Print
Quality Check Sheet.
e
Check the quality of the four color blocks
on the sheet.
f
The LCD asks you if the print quality is
OK.
Do one of the following:
 If all lines are clear and visible, press
Yes to finish the Print Quality check
and go to step j.
 If you can see missing short lines as
shown below, press No.
OK
A
i
After cleaning is finished, press
Color Start.
The machine starts printing the Print
Quality Check Sheet again and then
return to step e.
j
Press Stop/Exit.
If you repeat this procedure at least five
times and the print quality is still poor,
replace the ink cartridge for the clogged
color.
After replacing the ink cartridge, check
the print quality. If the problem still
exists, repeat the cleaning and test print
procedures at least five times for the
new ink cartridge. If ink is still missing,
call Brother Customer Service. (See
Brother numbers on page i.)
IMPORTANT
DO NOT touch the print head. Touching
the print head may cause permanent
damage and may void the print head's
warranty.
Note
Poor
i
A
g
The LCD asks you if the print quality is
OK for black and the three colors.
Press Yes or No.
h
The LCD asks you if you want to start
cleaning.
Press Color Start.
The machine starts cleaning the print
head.
When a print head
nozzle is clogged
the printed
sample looks like
this.
After the print
head nozzle is
cleaned, the
horizontal lines
are gone.
69
Checking the print alignment
You may need to adjust the print alignment
after transporting the machine if your printed
text becomes blurred or images become
faded.
a
Press
b
c
d
Press Test Print.
.
Press Alignment.
Press Black Start or Color Start.
The machine starts printing the
Alignment Check Sheet.
e
For the “A” pattern, press the number of
the test print that has the least visible
vertical stripes (1-9).
f
For the “B” pattern, press the number of
the test print that has the least visible
vertical stripes (1-9).
g
For the “C” pattern, press the number of
the test print that has the least visible
vertical stripes (1-9).
h
For the “D” pattern, press the number of
the test print that has the least visible
vertical stripes (1-9).
i
Press Stop/Exit.
70
A
B
Troubleshooting
B
Error and Maintenance messages
B
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and consumable items may need to be
replaced. If this happens, your machine identifies the problem and shows a message. The most
common error and maintenance messages are shown below.
You can correct most errors and clear routine maintenance messages by yourself. If you need
more help, the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.
Error Message
Cause
Action
B&W Print Only
One or more of the color ink cartridges
have reached the end of their life.
Replace the ink cartridges. (See
Replacing the ink cartridges
on page 65.)
Replace Ink
You can use the machine in
black & white mode for approximately
four weeks depending on the number
of pages you print.
While this message appears on the
LCD, each operation works in the
following way:
If you unplug the machine or take out
the ink cartridge, you cannot use the
machine until you change to a new ink
cartridge.
 Printing
If you click Grayscale in the
Advanced tab of the printer driver
you can use the machine as a
black & white printer.
 Copying
If the paper type is set to
Plain Paper you can make
copies in black & white.
Duplex copy is not available when
this message appears.
 Faxing
B
If the paper type is set to
Plain Paper or
Inkjet Paper, the machine will
receive and print the faxes in
black & white.
If a sending machine has a color
fax, the machine’s “handshake”
will ask that the fax be sent as
black & white.
If the paper type is set to
Other Glossy, Brother BP71 or
Brother BP61 the machine will stop
all print operations.
71
Error Message
Cause
Action
Cannot Detect
You installed a new ink cartridge too
quickly and the machine did not detect
it.
Take out the new ink cartridge and
re-install it slowly until it clicks.
If you are not using Genuine Brother
Innobella™ ink the machine may not
detect the ink cartridge.
Use a new Genuine Brother
Innobella™ Ink Cartridge. If the error
is not cleared, call Brother Customer
Service.
An ink cartridge is not installed
properly.
Take out the new ink cartridge and
re-install it slowly until it clicks. (See
Replacing the ink cartridges
on page 65.)
One or more of the ink cartridges have
reached the end of their life. The
machine will stop all print operations.
While memory is available, black and
white faxes will be stored in the
memory. If a sending machine has a
color fax, the machine's “handshake”
will ask that the fax be sent as black &
white. If the sending machine has the
ability to convert it, the color fax will be
stored in the memory as a black &
white fax.
Replace the ink cartridges. (See
Replacing the ink cartridges
on page 65.)
Comm.Error
Poor telephone line quality caused a
communication error.
Send the fax again or connect the
machine to another telephone line. If
the problem continues, call the
telephone company and ask them to
check your telephone line.
Connection Fail
You tried to poll a fax machine that is
not in Polled Waiting mode.
Check the other fax machine's polling
setup.
Cover is Open.
The scanner cover is not completely
closed.
Lift the scanner cover and then close it
again.
The ADF cover is not completely
closed.
Open the ADF cover and then close it
again.
The ink cartridge cover is not
completely closed.
Firmly close the ink cartridge cover
until it clicks.
Data Remaining
Print data is left in the machine's
memory.
Press Stop/Exit. The machine will
cancel the job and clear it from the
memory. Try to print again.
Disconnected
The other person or other person's fax
machine stopped the call.
Try to send or receive again.
If calls are stopped repeatedly and you
are using a VoIP (Voice over IP)
system, try changing the Compatibility
to Basic (for VoIP). (See Telephone
line interference / VoIP on page 98.)
Document Jam/too Long
The document was not inserted or fed
properly, or the document scanned
from the ADF was too long.
(See Using the ADF on page 28.)
Cannot Print
Replace Ink
72
(See Document jam on page 80.)
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Cause
Action
DR Mode in Use
The machine is set to Distinctive Ring
mode. You cannot change the
Receive Mode from Manual to another
mode.
Set Distinctive Ring to Off. (See
Turning off Distinctive Ring
on page 44.)
High Temperature
The print head is too warm.
Allow the machine to cool down.
Hub is Unusable.
A Hub or USB Flash memory drive
with Hub has been connected to the
USB direct interface.
A Hub or USB Flash memory drive
with Hub are not supported. Unplug
the device from the USB direct
interface.
Image Too Long.
The proportions of your photo are
irregular so effects could not be
added.
Choose a regularly proportioned
image.
Image Too Small.
The size of your photo is too small to
trim.
Choose a larger image.
Ink Absorber Full
The ink absorber box or flushing box is
full. These components are periodic
maintenance items that may require
replacement after a period of time to
ensure optimum performance from
your Brother machine. The need to
replace these items and the time
period before replacement is
dependent on the number of purges
and flushes required to clean the ink
system. These boxes acquire
amounts of ink during the different
purging and flushing operations. The
number of times a machine purges
and flushes for cleaning varies
depending on different situations. For
example, frequently powering the
machine on and off will cause
numerous cleaning cycles since the
machine automatically cleans upon
power up. The use of non-Brother ink
may cause frequent cleanings
because non-Brother ink could cause
poor print quality which is resolved by
cleaning. The more cleaning the
machine requires the faster these
boxes will fill up.
The ink absorber box or flushing box
will need to be replaced. Contact
Brother Customer Service or a Brother
Authorized Service Center to have
your machine serviced. (See Brother
numbers on page i.)
Other reasons for cleaning are:
1
Machine automatically cleans after
clearing a printer jam.
2
Machine automatically cleans after
sitting idle for more than 45 days
(infrequent use).
B
Note
Repairs resulting from the use of
non-Brother supplies may not be
covered under the stated product
warranty.
73
Error Message
Cause
Action
Ink Absorber NearFull
The ink absorber box or flushing box is
nearly full.
The ink absorber box or flushing box
will need to be replaced soon. Call
Brother Customer Service or a Brother
Authorized Service Center to have
your machine serviced. (See Brother
numbers on page i.)
Ink low
One or more of the ink cartridges are
near the end of their life. If one of the
color ink cartridges is near the end of
its life and a sending machine has a
color fax to send, your machine’s
“handshake” will ask that the fax be
sent as black & white. If the sending
machine has the ability to convert it,
the color fax will be printed at your
machine as a black & white fax.
Order a new ink cartridge. You can
continue printing until the LCD shows
Cannot Print. (See Ordering
accessories and supplies on page ii
and Replacing the ink cartridges
on page 65.)
Low Temperature
The print head is too cold.
Allow the machine to warm up.
Media Error
The memory card is either corrupted,
improperly formatted, or there is a
problem with the memory card.
Put the card firmly into the slot again to
make sure it is in the correct position.
If the error remains, check the media
drive (slot) of the machine by putting in
another memory card that you know is
working.
Media is Full.
The memory card or USB Flash
memory drive you are using has no
available space or already contains
999 files.
Your machine can only save to your
memory card or USB Flash memory
drive if it contains less than 999 files.
Delete unused files to free some
space and try again.
No Caller ID
There is no incoming call history. You
did not receive calls or you have not
subscribed to the Caller ID service
from your telephone company.
If you want to use the Caller ID feature
call your telephone company. (See
Caller ID in chapter 5 of the Advanced
User’s Guide.)
No File
The memory card or USB Flash
memory drive in the media drive does
not contain a .JPG file.
Put the correct memory card or USB
Flash memory drive into the slot again.
No Ink Cartridge
An ink cartridge is not installed
properly.
Take out the new ink cartridge and reinstall it slowly until it clicks. (See
Replacing the ink cartridges
on page 65.)
74
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Cause
Action
No Paper Fed
The machine is out of paper or paper
is not properly loaded in the paper
tray.
Do one of the following:
 Refill the paper in the paper tray,
and then press Black Start or
Color Start.
 Remove the paper and load it
again, and then press Black Start
or Color Start. (See Loading
paper and other print media
on page 10.)
The paper is jammed in the machine.
Remove the jammed paper by
following the steps in Printer jam or
paper jam on page 81.
If you see this error often when making
a duplex copy or duplex print, the
paper feed rollers may be stained with
ink. Clean the paper feed rollers. (See
Cleaning the paper feed rollers in
appendix A of the Advanced User's
Guide.)
Paper powder has accumulated on the
surface of the paper pick-up rollers
and the back sides of the paper feed
rollers.
Clean the paper pick-up rollers and
the back sides of the paper feed
rollers. (See Cleaning the paper
pick-up rollers in appendix A of the
Advanced User's Guide.)
The Jam Clear Cover is not closed
properly.
Make sure the Jam Clear Cover is
closed evenly at both ends. (See
Printer jam or paper jam on page 81.)
The paper was not inserted in the
Remove the paper and re-insert it in
center position of the manual feed slot. the center of the manual feed slot, and
then press Black Start or
Color Start. (See Loading paper in
the manual feed slot on page 17.)
No Response/Busy
The number you dialed does not
answer or is busy.
Verify the number and try again.
Not Registered
You tried to access a One Touch or
Speed Dial number that is not
programmed.
Set up the One Touch or Speed Dial
number. (See Storing One Touch Dial
numbers on page 50 and Storing
Speed Dial numbers on page 51.)
75
B
Error Message
Cause
Action
Out of Fax Memory
The fax memory is full.
Do one of the following:
 Clear the data in the memory. To
gain extra memory, you can turn
off Memory Receive. (See Turning
off Memory Receive operations in
chapter 4 of the Advanced User’s
Guide.)
 Print the faxes that are in the
memory. (See Printing a fax from
the memory in chapter 4 of the
Advanced User’s Guide.)
Out of Memory
The machine's memory is full.
If a copy operation is in process:
Press Stop/Exit and wait until the
other operations finish, and then try
again.
Paper Jam [Front]
The memory card or USB Flash
memory drive you are using does not
have enough free space to scan the
document.
Delete unused files from your memory
card or USB Flash memory drive to
make some free space and then try
again.
Paper is jammed in the machine.
Remove the jammed paper by
following the steps in Paper is jammed
at the front of the machine on page 81.
Make sure the paper length guide is
set to the correct paper size. DO NOT
extend the paper tray when you load
A5 or smaller size paper.
Paper Jam [Front,Rear]
Paper is jammed in the machine.
Remove the jammed paper by
following the steps in Paper is jammed
at the front and back of the machine
on page 83.
Make sure the paper length guide is
set to the correct paper size. DO NOT
extend the paper tray when you load
A5 or smaller size paper.
More than one sheet of paper was
placed in the manual feed slot.
—OR—
Another sheet of paper was placed in
the manual feed slot before the LCD
showed
Put paper in Manual Feed Slot
Then Press Start.
76
Do not put more than one sheet of
paper in the manual feed slot at any
one time. Wait until the LCD shows
Put paper in Manual Feed Slot
Then Press Start before you feed
the next sheet of paper in the manual
feed slot.
Remove the jammed paper by
following the steps in Paper is jammed
at the front and back of the machine
on page 83.
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Cause
Action
Paper Jam [Rear]
Paper is jammed in the machine.
Remove the jammed paper by
following the steps in Paper is jammed
at the back of the machine
on page 82.
Make sure the paper length guide is
set to the correct paper size.
DO NOT extend the paper tray when
you load A5 or smaller size paper.
Touchscreen
initialization
failed
Unable to Clean XX
Unable to Init. XX
Unable to Print XX
Unable to Scan XX
Paper powder has accumulated on the
surface of the paper pick-up rollers
and the back sides of the paper feed
rollers.
Clean the paper pick-up rollers and
the back sides of the paper feed
rollers. (See Cleaning the paper
pick-up rollers in appendix A of the
Advanced User's Guide.)
The Touchscreen was pressed before
the power on initialization was
completed.
Make sure that nothing is touching or
resting on the Touchscreen.
Debris may be stuck between the
lower part of the touchscreen and its
frame.
Insert a piece of stiff paper between
the lower part of the touchscreen and
its frame and slide it back and forth to
push out the debris.
The machine has a mechanical
problem.
Open the scanner cover and remove
any foreign objects and paper scraps
from inside the machine. If the error
message continues, disconnect the
machine from the power for several
minutes and reconnect it.
—OR—
A foreign object such as a paper clip or
ripped paper is in the machine.
(The machine can be turned off for
approximately 24 hours without losing
faxes stored in the memory. See
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal
report on page 79.)
Unusable Device
Disconnect device from
front connector & turn
machine off & then on
Unusable Device
Please Disconnect
USB Device.
A broken device has been connected
to the USB direct interface.
Unplug the device from the USB direct
interface, then press On/Off to turn
the machine off and then on again.
A USB device or USB Flash memory Unplug the device from the USB direct
interface. Turn the machine off and
drive that is not supported has been
connected to the USB direct interface. then on again.
For more information, visit us at
http://solutions.brother.com/.
Wrong Ink Color
A color ink cartridge has been installed
in the Black ink cartridge position.
Check which ink cartridges are not
matched by color to their ink cartridge
positions and move them to their
proper positions.
77
B
Error Message
Cause
Action
Wrong Paper Size
The Paper Size setting does not
match the size of paper in the tray. Or,
you did not set the paper guides in the
tray to the indicators for the paper size
you are using.
1
Check that the paper size you
choose matches the size of paper
in the tray.
2
Make sure you loaded the paper in
a Portrait position, by setting the
paper guides at the indicators for
your paper size.
3
After you have checked the paper
size and the paper position, press
Black Start or Color Start to
continue printing.
1
Press Tray Setting, and make
sure the machine’s Paper Size and
Tray Use settings match the size
of paper in the tray you are using.
(See Paper Size and Type
on page 22 and Tray use in COPY
mode on page 22.)
2
After you have checked the paper
size and tray use settings, press
Black Start or Color Start to
continue printing.
Wrong Tray Setting
78
The machine’s Paper Size and Tray
Use settings do not match the size of
paper in the tray you are using.
Troubleshooting
Error animation
B
g
 If the LCD shows No Data, there
are no faxes left in the machine's
memory.
Error animations display step-by-step
instructions when paper gets jammed. You
can read the steps at your own pace by
pressing c to see the next step and d to go
backward.
Transferring your faxes or Fax
Journal report
Press Stop/Exit.
 Enter the fax number to which faxes
will be forwarded.
h
Transferring faxes to your PC
 Unable to Init. XX
 Unable to Print XX
 Unable to Scan XX
We recommend transferring your faxes to
another fax machine or to your PC. (See
Transferring faxes to another fax machine
on page 79 or Transferring faxes to your PC
on page 79.)
You can also transfer the Fax Journal report
to see if there are any faxes you need to
transfer. (See Transferring the Fax Journal
report to another fax machine on page 80.)
a
b
c
d
e
f
a
Press Stop/Exit to interrupt the error
temporarily.
b
Make sure you have installed
MFL-Pro Suite on your PC, and then
turn on PC-FAX Receiving on the PC.
(For details see PC-FAX receiving in the
Software User’s Guide.)
c
Make sure you have set PC-Fax
Receive on the machine. (See PC-Fax
Receive (Windows® only) in chapter 4 of
the Advanced User’s Guide.)
If faxes are in the machine’s memory
when you set up PC-Fax Receive, the
LCD will ask if you want to transfer the
faxes to your PC.
d
Do one of the following:
B
 To transfer all faxes to your PC,
press Yes. You will be asked if you
want to also turn on backup print.
Press Stop/Exit to interrupt the error
temporarily.
 To exit and leave the faxes in the
memory, press No.
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Service.
B
You can transfer the faxes from your
machine's memory to your PC.
 Unable to Clean XX
If you have not set up your Station ID, you
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Set your
Station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)
Press Black Start.
B
If the LCD shows:
Transferring faxes to another fax
machine
Do one of the following:
e
Press Stop/Exit.
Press Service.
Press Data Transfer.
Press Fax Transfer.
79
B
Transferring the Fax Journal report to
another fax machine
If you have not set up your Station ID, you
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Set your
Station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)
a
Press Stop/Exit to interrupt the error
temporarily.
b
c
d
e
f
g
Press MENU.
h
Press Black Start.
Press a or b to display Service.
Press Service.
Press Data Transfer.
Document jam
Documents can jam in the ADF unit if they are
not inserted or fed properly, or if they are too
long. Follow the steps below to clear a
document jam.
Document is jammed in the top of the
ADF unit
a
Take out any paper from the ADF that is
not jammed.
b
c
Open the ADF cover.
d
e
Close the ADF cover.
Press Report Trans.
Pull the jammed document out to the
right.
Enter the fax number to which the Fax
Journal report will be forwarded.
Press Stop/Exit.
IMPORTANT
To avoid future document jams close the
ADF cover properly by pressing it down in
the middle.
80
B
B
B
Troubleshooting
Document is jammed inside the ADF
unit
a
b
c
B
Take out any paper from the ADF that is
not jammed.
c
d
Close the document cover.
Press Stop/Exit.
Printer jam or paper jam
Lift the document cover.
B
Take out the jammed paper depending on
where it is jammed in the machine.
Pull the jammed document out to the
right.
Paper is jammed at the front of the
machine
B
If the LCD shows Paper Jam [Front],
follow these steps:
d
e
Unplug the machine from the AC power
outlet.
b
Pull the paper tray (1) completely out of
the machine.
1
Close the document cover.
Press Stop/Exit.
Removing small documents jammed
in the ADF
a
b
a
Lift the document cover.
B
c
Pull out the jammed paper (1).
Insert a piece of stiff paper, such as
cardstock, into the ADF to push any
small paper scraps through.
B
1
81
d
Lift the Jam Clear flap, and remove the
jammed paper.
Paper is jammed at the back of the
machine
If the LCD shows Paper Jam [Rear],
follow these steps:
a
Unplug the machine from the AC power
outlet.
Note
Make sure you remove paper from the
manual feed slot, and then close it.
b
e
Open the Jam Clear Cover (1) at the
back of the machine.
Put the paper tray firmly back in the
machine.
1
c
Note
Make sure you pull out the paper support
until it clicks.
f
Re-connect the power cord.
Note
If there is a repeat paper jam, a small
piece of paper may be stuck in the
machine. (See Additional paper jam clear
operations on page 86.)
82
Pull the jammed paper out of the
machine.
B
Troubleshooting
d
b
Close the Jam Clear Cover. Make sure
the cover is closed properly.
Pull paper tray #1 (1) and then
tray #2 (2) completely out of the
machine.
1
e
Re-connect the power cord.
Paper is jammed at the front and back
of the machine
2
B
If the LCD shows
Paper Jam [Front,Rear], follow these
steps:
a
Unplug the machine from the AC power
outlet.
c
Pull out the jammed paper (1).
Note
Make sure you remove paper from the
manual feed slot, and then close it.
1
B
1
83
d
e
Lift the flap, and remove the jammed
paper.
(With trays removed, go to step e.)
Open the Jam Clear Cover (1) at the
back of the machine.
1
84
f
Pull the jammed paper out of the
machine.
g
Close the Jam Clear Cover. Make sure
the cover is closed properly.
Troubleshooting
h
Put paper tray #1 (1) and then
tray #2 (2) firmly back in the machine.
1
IMPORTANT
• If the paper is jammed under the print
head, unplug the machine from the power
source, and then move the print head to
take out the paper.
• If the print head is at the right corner as
shown in the illustration, you cannot move
the print head. Re-connect the power
cord. Hold down Stop/Exit until the print
head moves to the middle. Then unplug
the machine from the power source and
take out the paper.
2
i
Using both hands, use the finger holds
on each side of the machine to lift the
scanner cover (1) into the open position.
Move the print head (if necessary) to
take out any paper remaining in this
area. Make sure that jammed paper is
not left in the corners of the machine (2)
and (3).
• If ink gets on your skin or clothing
immediately wash it off with soap or
detergent.
1
B
3
2
85
j
Gently close the scanner cover using
the finger holds on each side.
Additional paper jam clear operations
a
Using both hands, use the finger holds
on each side of the machine to lift the
scanner cover into the open position.
Note
If the print head is at the right corner as
shown in the illustration, hold down
Stop/Exit until the print head moves to the
middle.
CAUTION
Be careful not to trap your fingers under the
scanner cover.
Always use the finger holds provided on
each side of the scanner cover when
opening and closing it.
Note
Make sure you pull out the paper support
until it clicks.
k
Re-connect the power cord.
Note
If there is a repeat paper jam, a small
piece of paper may be stuck in the
machine. (See Additional paper jam clear
operations on page 86.)
86
b
Unplug the machine from the AC power
outlet.
c
Gently close the scanner cover using
the finger holds on each side.
B
Troubleshooting
CAUTION
Be careful not to trap your fingers under the
scanner cover.
Always use the finger holds provided on
each side of the scanner cover when
opening and closing it.
d
Open the manual feed slot cover.
e
Put only one sheet of letter or A4 sized
thick paper such as glossy paper in a
Landscape position in the manual feed
slot.
Push it into the manual feed slot.
f
Re-connect the power cord.
The paper you placed in the manual
feed slot will be fed through the machine
and ejected.
g
Using both hands, use the finger holds
on each side of the machine to lift the
scanner cover into the open position.
Make sure that a piece of paper is not
still jammed inside the machine.
Gently close the scanner cover using
the finger holds on each side.
B
Note
• We recommend you use glossy paper.
• If you don't push the paper deep into the
manual feed slot, the machine will not feed
it when you re-connect the power cord.
87
Troubleshooting
B
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be
made from within that country.
If you think there is a problem with your machine, check the chart below and follow the
troubleshooting tips.
Most problems can be easily resolved by yourself. If you need additional help, the Brother
Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.
Using non-Brother supplies may affect the print quality, hardware performance, and machine
reliability.
If you are having difficulty with your machine
Printing
Difficulty
Suggestions
No printout.
Check the interface cable or wireless connection on both the machine and your
computer. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)
Check that the machine is plugged in and that the On/Off key is on.
One or more ink cartridges have reached the end of their life.
(See Replacing the ink cartridges on page 65.)
Check to see if the LCD is showing an error message.
(See Error and Maintenance messages on page 71.)
If the LCD shows Cannot Print and Replace Ink, see Replacing the ink
cartridges on page 65.
Check that the correct printer driver has been installed and chosen.
Make sure that the machine is online. Click Start and then Printers and Faxes.
Right-click and choose Brother MFC-XXXXX (where XXXXX is your model
name), and make sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.
88
B
Troubleshooting
Printing (continued)
Difficulty
Suggestions
Poor print quality.
Check the print quality. (See Checking the print quality on page 69.)
Make sure that the Media Type setting in the printer driver or the Paper Type
setting in the machine’s menu matches the type of paper you are using. (See
Printing for Windows® or Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the Software User’s
Guide and Paper Size and Type on page 22.)
Make sure that your ink cartridges are fresh. The following may cause ink to clog:
 The expiration date written on the cartridge package has passed. (Genuine
Brother Innobella™ ink cartridges stay usable for up to two years if kept in their
original packaging.)
 The ink cartridge has been in your machine for over six months.
 The ink cartridge may not have been stored properly before use.
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink. Using non-Brother
supplies may affect the print quality, hardware performance, and machine
reliability.
Use the recommended types of paper.
(See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 24.)
The recommended environment for your machine is between 68 F to 91 F
(20 C to 33 C).
White horizontal lines appear in text
or graphics.
Clean the print head. (See Cleaning the print head on page 68.)
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.
Try using the recommended types of paper.
(See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 24.)
The machine prints blank pages.
Clean the print head. (See Cleaning the print head on page 68.)
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.
Characters and lines are blurred.
Check the printing alignment. (See Checking the print alignment on page 70.)
Printed text or images are skewed.
Make sure the paper is loaded properly in the paper tray and the paper side guides
are adjusted correctly. (See Loading paper and other print media on page 10.)
Make sure the Jam Clear Cover is closed properly.
Smudge or stain at the top center of
the printed page.
Make sure the paper is not too thick or curled.
(See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 24.)
Printing appears dirty or ink seems
to run.
Make sure you are using the recommended types of paper. (See Acceptable
paper and other print media on page 24.) Don't handle the paper until the ink is
dry.
B
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.
If you are using photo paper, make sure that you have set the correct paper type.
If you are printing a photo from your PC, set the Media Type in the Basic tab of
the printer driver.
Stains appear on the reverse side
or at the bottom of the page.
Make sure the printer platen is not dirty with ink. (See Cleaning the machine’s
printer platen in appendix A of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.
Make sure you are using the paper support flap.
(See Loading paper and other print media on page 10.)
The machine prints dense lines on
the page.
Check Reverse Order in the Basic tab of the printer driver.
89
Printing (continued)
Difficulty
Suggestions
The printouts are wrinkled.
(Windows® users)
In the printer driver Advanced tab, click Color Settings, and uncheck
Bi-Directional Printing.
(Macintosh users)
In the printer driver, choose Print Settings, click Advanced, choose
Other Print Options, and uncheck Bi-Directional Printing.
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.
Cannot perform “Page Layout”
printing.
Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer driver are the
same.
Print speed is too slow.
Try changing the printer driver setting. The highest resolution needs longer data
processing, sending and printing time. Try the other quality settings in the printer
driver Advanced tab. Also, click Color Settings, and make sure you uncheck
Color Enhancement (True2Life).
Turn the borderless feature off. Borderless printing is slower than normal printing.
(See Printing for Windows® or Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the Software
User’s Guide.)
True2Life™ is not working properly.
If the image data is not full color in your application (such as 256 color),
True2Life™ will not work. Use at least 24 bit color data with the True2Life™
feature.
Photo paper does not feed
properly.
When you print on Brother Photo paper, load one extra sheet of the same photo
paper in the paper tray. An extra sheet has been included in the paper package
for this purpose.
Clean the paper pick-up rollers. (See Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers in
appendix A of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
Machine feeds multiple pages.
Make sure the paper is loaded properly in the paper tray. (See Loading paper and
other print media on page 10.)
Load only one size of paper and one type of paper in the paper tray at any one
time.
There is a paper jam.
Make sure the paper length guide is set to the correct paper size. Do not extend
the paper tray when you load A5 or smaller size paper. (See Printer jam or paper
jam on page 81.)
Paper jam reoccurs.
If there is a repeat paper jam, a small piece of paper may be stuck in the machine.
Make sure paper is not still jammed in the machine. (See Additional paper jam
clear operations on page 86.)
The paper jams when you use
duplex copy or duplex print.
Use one of the jam prevention settings, DX1 or DX2. For copying, see Duplex
(2-sided) copying in chapter 7 of the Advanced User’s Guide;
for printing see Duplex / Booklet for Windows® or Duplex Printing for Macintosh in
the Software User's Guide.
If paper jams often when using duplex copy or duplex print, the paper feed rollers
may be stained with ink. Clean the paper feed rollers. (See Cleaning the paper
feed rollers in appendix A of the Advanced User's Guide.)
Printed pages are not stacked
neatly.
Make sure you are using the paper support flap.
(See Loading paper and other print media on page 10.)
Machine does not print from
Try to reduce the print resolution. (See Printing for Windows® or Printing and
Faxing for Macintosh in the Software User’s Guide.)
Adobe
90
®
Illustrator®.
Troubleshooting
Printing Received Faxes
Difficulty
Suggestions
Condensed print and white streaks
across the page or the top and
bottom of sentences are cut off.
You probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone
line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.
Vertical black lines when receiving.
The sender's scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the
problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.
Received color fax prints only in
black & white.
Replace the color ink cartridges that have reached the end of their life, and then
ask the other person to send the color fax again.
(See Replacing the ink cartridges on page 65.)
Left and right margins are cut off or
a single page is printed on two
pages.
Turn on Auto Reduction. (See Printing a reduced incoming fax in chapter 4 of the
Advanced User’s Guide.)
Telephone Line or Connections
Difficulty
Suggestions
Dialing does not work.
(No dial tone)
Check that the machine is plugged in and that the On/Off key is on.
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into
the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine.
(Canada only) Change the Tone/Pulse setting. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)
Verify that the telephone line and jack are working by connecting a known working
telephone and telephone line to the jack. Then lift the external telephone’s handset
and listen for a dial tone. If there is no dial tone, ask your telephone company to
check the line and/or jack.
The machine does not answer
when called.
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode for your setup.
(See Choose the correct Receive Mode on page 35.) Check for a dial tone. If
possible, call your machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer, check that
the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack
of the machine. If there is no ringing when you call your machine, ask your
telephone company to check the line.
B
91
Receiving Faxes
Difficulty
Suggestions
Cannot receive a fax.
Make sure your machine has a dial tone by pressing the Hook key. If you hear
static or interference on your fax line, please contact your local telephone
company.
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into
the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL
or VoIP services, please contact your service provider for connection instructions.
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the
external devices and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as
the Brother machine. (See Choose the correct Receive Mode on page 35.)
If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically
answer all incoming faxes, you should select Fax Only mode.
If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you
should select External TAD mode. In External TAD mode, your Brother
machine will automatically receive incoming faxes and voice callers will be able to
leave a message on your answering machine.
If your Brother machine shares the line with a Voice Mail subscriber service,
please see Voice Mail on page 42.
If your Brother machine is on a line with the Distinctive Ring subscriber service,
please see Distinctive Ring on page 43.
If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to
automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Tel mode. In
Fax/Tel mode, your Brother machine will automatically receive faxes and
produce a pseudo/double-ring to alert you to answer voice calls.
If you do not want your Brother machine to automatically answer any incoming
faxes, you should select Manual mode. In Manual mode, you must answer every
incoming call and activate the machine to receive faxes.
Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your
Brother machine answers. To test this, lower the Ring Delay setting:
 If the Receive Mode is set to Fax Only or Fax/Tel, reduce the Ring Delay
to 1 ring. (See Ring Delay on page 38.)
 If the Receive Mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings
programmed on your answering machine to 2.
 If the Receive Mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the Ring Delay setting.
Have someone send you a test fax:
 If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating properly.
Remember to reset your Ring Delay or answering machine setting back to
your original setting. If receiving problems recur after resetting the Ring Delay,
then a person, device, or subscriber service is answering the fax call before
the machine has a chance to answer.
 If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber
service may be interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem
with your fax line.
92
Troubleshooting
Receiving Faxes (continued)
Difficulty
Suggestions
Cannot receive a fax.
If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TAD mode) on the
same line as the Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up
correctly. (See Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device)
on page 45.)
(continued)
1
Plug the telephone line cord directly from the wall telephone jack to your
Brother machine’s LINE jack.
2
Remove the protective cap from your Brother machine’s EXT. jack, and then
plug the telephone line cord from your answering machine into the EXT. jack.
3
Set your answering machine to answer within 4 rings.
If you are having problems receiving faxes or voice messages, set your
answering machine to answer within 2 or 3 rings.
4
Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.
 Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing message.
 Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
 End your outgoing message with your Fax Receive Code for people
sending manual faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or
press l 5 1 and Start to send a fax.”
5
Set your answering machine to answer calls.
6
Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD. (See Choose
the correct Receive Mode on page 35.)
Make sure your Brother machine’s Easy Receive feature is turned On. Easy
Receive is a feature that allows you to receive a fax even if you have answered
the call on an external or extension telephone. (See Easy Receive on page 39.)
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone
line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See
Telephone line interference / VoIP on page 98.)
Sending Faxes
Difficulty
Suggestions
Cannot send a fax.
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into
the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine.
Make sure that the FAX
key is illuminated.
B
Ask the other party to check that the receiving machine has paper.
Print the Transmission Verification Report and check for an error. (See Reports in
chapter 6 of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
Transmission Verification Report
says “RESULT:NG”.
There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again. If
you send a PC FAX message and get “RESULT:NG” on the Transmission
Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To gain extra memory,
you can turn off Memory Receive (see Turning off Memory Receive operations in
chapter 4 of the Advanced User’s Guide), print fax messages in memory (see
Printing a fax from the memory in chapter 4 of the Advanced User’s Guide) or cancel
a Delayed Fax or Polling Job. (see Canceling a fax in progress on page 33 and
Checking and canceling waiting jobs in chapter 3 of the Advanced User’s Guide.) If
the problem continues, ask the telephone company to check your telephone line.
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone
line, try changing the menu setting of Compatibility to Basic(for VoIP).
(See Telephone line interference / VoIP on page 98.)
93
Sending Faxes (continued)
Difficulty
Suggestions
Sent faxes are blank.
Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Loading documents
on page 28.)
Poor fax send quality.
Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your
machine's scanner operation. If the copy quality is not good, clean the scanner.
(See Cleaning the scanner on page 67.)
Vertical black lines when sending.
Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid
on the glass strip. Clean the glass strip. (See Cleaning the scanner on page 67.)
Handling Incoming Calls
Difficulty
Suggestions
The machine “hears” a voice as a
CNG Tone.
If Easy Receive is set to On, your machine is more sensitive to sounds. It may
mistakenly interpret certain voices or music on the line as a fax machine calling
and respond with fax receiving tones. Deactivate the machine by pressing
Stop/Exit. Try avoiding this problem by turning Easy Receive to Off.
(See Easy Receive on page 39.)
Sending a fax call to the machine.
If you answered on an extension telephone, press your Fax Receive Code (the
factory setting is l 5 1). If you answered on the external telephone (connected to
the EXT. jack), press Start to receive the fax. When your machine answers, hang
up.
Custom features on a single line.
If you have Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID, Voice Mail, an alarm system or
other custom feature on a single telephone line with your machine, it may create
a problem sending or receiving faxes.
For example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and
its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax,
the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother's ECM (Error
Correction Mode) feature should help overcome this problem. This condition is
related to the telephone system industry and is common to all devices that send
and receive information on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding
a slight interruption is crucial to your business, a separate telephone line with no
custom features is recommended.
Copying Difficulties
Difficulty
Suggestions
Cannot make a copy.
Make sure that the COPY
Poor copy results when using the
ADF.
Try using the scanner glass. (See Using the scanner glass on page 29.)
Vertical black lines or streaks
appear in copies.
Vertical black lines or streaks on copies are typically caused by dirt or correction
fluid on the scanner. Clean the glass strip and scanner glass and the white bar and
white plastic above them. (See Cleaning the scanner on page 67.)
Copies are blank.
Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Loading documents
on page 28.)
Fit to Page does not work properly.
Make sure the document is not skewed on the scanner glass.
Reposition the document and try again.
94
key is illuminated.
Troubleshooting
Scanning Difficulties
Difficulty
Suggestions
TWAIN or WIA errors appear when
Make sure the Brother TWAIN or WIA driver is chosen as the primary source in
your scanning application. For example, in PaperPort12SE with OCR, click File,
Scan or Get Photo and click Select to choose the Brother TWAIN/WIA driver.
starting to scan. (Windows®)
TWAIN or ICA errors appear when
starting to scan. (Macintosh)
Make sure the Brother TWAIN driver is chosen as the primary source.
In PageManager, click File, Select Source and choose the Brother TWAIN driver.
Mac OS X 10.6.x users can also scan documents using the ICA Scanner Driver.
See Scanning a document using the ICA driver (Mac OS X 10.6.x) in the Software
User’s Guide.
Poor scanning results when using
the ADF.
Try using the scanner glass. (See Using the scanner glass on page 29.)
OCR does not work.
Try increasing the scanner resolution.
(Macintosh users)
Make sure you have finished downloading and installing Presto! PageManager
from:
http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
Software Difficulties
Difficulty
Suggestions
Cannot install software or print.
(Windows® users only)
Run the Repair MFL-Pro Suite program on the Installation CD-ROM. This
program will repair and reinstall the software.
“Device Busy”
Make sure the machine is not showing an error message on the LCD.
Cannot print images from
FaceFilter Studio.
To use FaceFilter Studio, you must install the FaceFilter Studio application from
the Installation CD-ROM supplied with your machine. To install FaceFilter Studio
see the Quick Setup Guide.
Also, before you start FaceFilter Studio for the first time, you must make sure your
Brother machine is turned on and connected to your computer. This will allow you
to access all the functions of FaceFilter Studio.
B
95
PhotoCapture Center™ Difficulties
Difficulty
Suggestions
Removable Disk does not work
properly.
1
If you are using Windows® 2000, have you installed the Windows ® 2000
update? If not, do the following:
1) Unplug the USB cable.
2) Install the Windows® 2000 update using one of the following methods.
 Install MFL-Pro Suite from the Installation CD-ROM. (See the Quick
Setup Guide.)
 Download the latest service pack from the Microsoft Web site.
3) Wait about 1 minute after you restart the PC, and then connect the USB
cable.
2
Take out the memory card or USB Flash memory drive and put it back in
again.
3
If you have tried “Eject” from within Windows®, take out the memory card or
USB Flash memory drive before you continue.
4
If an error message appears when you try to eject the memory card or USB
Flash memory drive, it means the card is being accessed. Wait a while and
then try again.
5
If all of the above do not work, turn off your PC and machine, and then turn
them on again. (You will have to unplug the power cord of the machine to turn
it off.)
Cannot access Removable Disk
from Desktop icon.
Make sure that you have correctly inserted the memory card or USB Flash
memory drive.
Part of my photo is missing when
printed.
Make sure that Borderless printing and Cropping are turned off. (See Borderless
printing and Cropping in chapter 8 of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
Network Difficulties
Difficulty
Suggestions
Cannot print over the network.
Make sure that your machine is powered on and is online and in Ready mode.
Print a Network Configuration list (see Reports in chapter 6 of the Advanced
User’s Guide.) and check the current Network settings printed in this list.
Reconnect the LAN cable to the hub to verify that the cabling and network
connections are good. If possible, try connecting the machine to a different port on
your hub using a different cable. If the connections are good, the machine shows
LAN Active for 2 seconds.
(If you are using a wireless connection or are having Network problems, see the
Network User’s Guide for more information.)
96
Troubleshooting
Network Difficulties (continued)
Difficulty
Suggestions
The network scanning feature does
not work.
(Windows® users)
It is necessary to configure the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow
Network scanning. To add port 54925 for Network scanning, enter the information
below:
In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother NetScan.
In Port number: Enter 54925.
In Protocol: UDP is selected.
Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
(Macintosh users)
Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located in
Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from the
model list in ControlCenter2.
The network PC-Fax Receive
feature does not work.
(Windows® users only)
It is necessary to set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow PC-FAX
Rx. To add port 54926 for Network PC-FAX Rx, enter the information below:
In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother PC-FAX Rx.
In Port number: Enter 54926.
In Protocol: UDP is selected.
Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
The Brother software cannot be
installed.
(Windows® users)
If the Security Software warning appears on the PC screen during the installation,
change the Security Software settings to permit the Brother product setup
program or other program to run.
(Macintosh users)
If you are using a firewall function of anti-spyware or antivirus security software,
temporarily disable it and then install the Brother software.
Cannot connect to wireless
network.
Reset the network settings.
Investigate the problem using the WLAN Report.
Press MENU, and then press a or b to display Print Reports. Press
Print Reports. Press a or b to display WLAN Report, and then press
WLAN Report.
For details, see the Network User’s Guide.
B
Press MENU, and then press a or b to display Network. Press Network. Press
a or b to display Network Reset, and then press Network Reset.
For details, see the Network User’s Guide.
Touchscreen Difficulties
Difficulty
Suggestions
The dial pad does not work when
entering numbers or characters.
Use the touchscreen buttons to enter information.
97
Dial Tone
Setting the dial tone to Detection will shorten
the dial detect pause.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
Press Initial Setup.
Press a or b to display Dial Tone.
Press Dial Tone.
Press Detection or No Detection.
B
Telephone line
interference / VoIP
If you are having problems sending or
receiving a fax due to possible interference
on the telephone line, we recommend that
you change the modem speed to minimize
errors in fax operations.
a
b
c
d
Press Stop/Exit.
e
f
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
Press Initial Setup.
Press a or b to display
Compatibility.
Press Compatibility.
Press High, Normal or
Basic(for VoIP).
 Basic(for VoIP) reduces the
modem speed to 9,600 bps and
turns off color fax receiving and
ECM, except for color fax sending.
Unless interference is a recurring
problem on your telephone line, you
may prefer to use it only when
needed.
To improve compatibility with most
VoIP services, Brother recommends
changing the compatibility setting to
Basic(for VoIP).
 Normal sets the modem speed at
14,400 bps.
 High increases the modem speed to
33,600 bps. (factory setting)
g
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
VoIP (Voice over IP) is a type of phone
system that uses an internet connection,
rather than a traditional phone line.
98
B
Troubleshooting
Machine Information
Checking the serial number
3 All Settings
B
You can restore all settings to their factory
defaults.
B
You can see the machine’s serial number on
the LCD.
a
b
c
d
Brother strongly recommends you use this
operation when you dispose of the
machine.
Note
Press MENU.
Unplug the interface cable before you
choose Network or All Settings.
Press a or b to display
Machine Info.
How to reset the machine
Press Machine Info.
Press Stop/Exit.
Reset functions
The following reset functions are available:
1 Network
You can reset the print server back to its
default factory settings, such as the
password and IP address information.
2 Speed Dial&Fax
Speed Dial & Fax resets the following
settings:
 Speed Dial
(Speed-Dial and Setup Groups)
B
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
B
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
Press Initial Setup.
Press a or b to display Reset.
Press Reset.
Press the type of reset you want to use.
Press Yes to confirm.
Press Yes for 2 seconds to reboot the
machine.
 Programmed fax jobs in the memory
(Polled Transmit, Delayed Fax and
Delayed Batch Transmission)
 Station ID
B
(Name and Number)
 Remote Fax Options
(Fax Forwarding and Paging)
 Report settings
(Transmission Verification Report,
Quick Dial List and Fax Journal)
 History
(Caller ID history and Outgoing Call)
 Faxes in memory
99
C
Menu and features
On-screen
programming
Your machine is designed to be easy to
operate with LCD on-screen programming
using the menu buttons on the Touchscreen.
User-friendly programming helps you take full
advantage of all the menu selections your
machine has to offer.
Since your programming is done on the LCD,
we have created step-by-step on-screen
instructions to help you program your
machine. All you need to do is follow the
instructions as they guide you through the
menu selections and programming options.
100
C
C
Menu and features
Menu table
C
The menu table will help you understand the menu selections and options that are found in the
machine's programs. The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
MENU (
)
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
General Setup
Mode Timer
—
Off
Sets the length of time
before the machine will
return to FAX mode and
before the machine will
change from a restricted
user to Public user mode
when using Secure
Function Lock.
See 1.
Sets the size of paper in
the paper tray #1.
22
0 Sec
30 Secs
1 Min
2 Mins*
5 Mins
Tray Setting
Tray#1
Paper Size
(Options)
Letter*
Legal
Ledger
A4
A5
A3
EXE
4"x6"
Paper Type
(Options)
Sets the type of paper in
the paper tray #1.
Plain Paper*
Inkjet Paper
Brother BP71
Brother BP61
Other Glossy
Transparency
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
C
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
101
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
General Setup
Tray Setting
Tray#2
Paper Size
22
(Continued)
(Continued)
Sets the size of paper in
the paper tray #2.
Choose the tray that will
be used for COPY mode.
22
Choose the tray that will
be used for FAX mode.
23
Adjusts the ring volume.
See 1 .
(Options)
Letter*
Legal
Ledger
A4
A3
EXE
Tray Use:Copy
Tray#1
Tray#2
Auto Select*
Tray Use:Fax
Tray#1
Tray#2
Auto Select*
Volume
Ring
Off
Low
Med*
High
Beeper
Off
Low*
Adjusts the beeper
volume.
Med
High
Speaker
Off
Low
Adjusts the speaker
volume.
Med*
High
Auto Daylight
—
On
Off*
LCD Settings
Backlight
Light*
Med
Change this setting to On
if you want the machine to
change automatically for
Daylight Saving Time.
You can adjust the
brightness of the LCD
backlight.
Dark
Dim Timer
Off
10 Secs
20 Secs
30 Secs*
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
102
You can set how long the
LCD backlight stays on
after the last key press.
Menu and features
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
General Setup
Sleep Mode
—
1 Min
You can choose how long
the machine must be idle
before it goes into Sleep
mode.
See 1.
Turn on this setting when
you use Ledger short
grain paper.
23
You can restrict selected
machine operation for up
to 10 restricted users and
for all other nonauthorized Public users.
See 1.
Sets the number of rings
before the machine
answers in Fax Only or
Fax/Tel mode.
38
Sets the length of the
pseudo/double-ring time
in Fax/Tel mode.
38
Receives fax messages
automatically when you
answer a call and hear fax
tones.
39
Allows you to answer all
calls at an extension
telephone and use codes
to turn the machine on or
off. You can personalize
these codes.
48
(Continued)
2 Mins
3 Mins
5 Mins*
10 Mins
30 Mins
60 Mins
LGR - Short Grain
—
On
Off*
Function Lock
Fax
Setup Receive
Set Password
—
Lock OffiOn
—
Setup User
—
Ring Delay
0
1
2
3
4*
F/T Ring Time
20 Secs*
30 Secs
40 Secs
70 Secs
Easy Receive
On*
Off
Remote Codes
On*
(l51, #51)
Off
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
C
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
103
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
Fax
Setup Receive
Auto Reduction
On*
See 1 .
(Continued)
(Continued)
Reduces the size of
incoming faxes.
Off
Memory Receive
Off*
Fax Forward
Paging
Fax Storage
PC Fax Receive
You can set the machine
to either forward fax
messages, call your
pager, store incoming
faxes in the memory (so
you can retrieve them
while you are away from
your machine), or send
faxes to your PC.
If you choose Fax Forward
or PC-Fax Receive, you
can turn on the safety
feature Backup Print.
Fax Preview
On
Off*
Report Setting
Transmission
On
On+Image
You can preview received
faxes.
39
Choose the initial setup for
Transmission Verification
Report.
34
Sets the interval for the
automatic printing of the
Fax Journal.
If you have chosen other
than Off and
Every 50 Faxes, you
can set the time for the
chosen option.
If you have chosen
Every 7 Days, you can
set the day of the week.
See 1 .
Off*
Off+Image
Off2
Off2+Image
Journal Period
Off
Every 50 Faxes*
Every 6 Hours
Every 12 Hours
Every 24 Hours
Every 2 Days
Every 7 Days
Print Fax
—
—
Prints incoming faxes
stored in the memory.
Remote Access
—
---
Set your own code for
Remote Retrieval.
Remaining Jobs
—
—
Check which jobs are in
the memory and cancel
chosen jobs.
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
104
Menu and features
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
Fax
Miscellaneous
Distinctive
Off*
Uses the telephone
company's Distinctive
Ring subscriber service to
register the ring pattern
with the machine.
43
Set up your 3-digit area
code only if you do not dial
it within your own area
code.
See 1.
(Continued)
Set (On)
Area Code
(USA only)
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
105
Network menu
Level1
Level2
Level3
Level4
Options
Descriptions
Network
Wired LAN
TCP/IP
BOOT Method
Auto*
Choose the
BOOT method
that best suits
your needs.
Static
RARP
BOOTP
DHCP
IP Address
[000-255].
[000-255].
Enter the IP
address.
[000-255].
[000-255]
Subnet Mask
[000-255].
[000-255].
Enter the Subnet
mask.
[000-255].
[000-255]
Gateway
[000-255].
[000-255].
Enter the
Gateway
address.
[000-255].
[000-255]
Node Name
BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX
Enter the Node
name.
WINS Config
Auto*
Chooses the
WINS
configuration
mode.
Static
WINS Server
(Primary)
000.000.000.000
(Secondary)
000.000.000.000
DNS Server
(Primary)
000.000.000.000
(Secondary)
000.000.000.000
APIPA
On*
Off
See Network User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
106
Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or
secondary
server.
Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or
secondary
server.
Automatically
allocates the IP
address from the
link-local address
range.
Menu and features
Level1
Level2
Level3
Level4
Options
Descriptions
Network
Wired LAN
TCP/IP
IPv6
On
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Enable or disable
the IPv6 protocol.
If you want to use
the IPv6 protocol,
visit
http://solutions.
brother.com/ for
more information.
Ethernet
Off*
—
Auto*
100B-FD
Chooses the
Ethernet link
mode.
100B-HD
10B-FD
10B-HD
WLAN
MAC Address
—
—
You can see your
machine’s MAC
address.
TCP/IP
BOOT Method
Auto*
Chooses the
BOOT method
that best suits
your needs.
Static
RARP
BOOTP
DHCP
IP Address
[000-255].
[000-255].
Enter the IP
address.
[000-255].
[000-255]
Subnet Mask
[000-255].
[000-255].
Enter the Subnet
mask.
[000-255].
[000-255]
Gateway
[000-255].
[000-255].
Enter the
Gateway
address.
[000-255].
[000-255]
Node Name
BRWXXXXXXXXXXXX
Enter the Node
name.
WINS Config
Auto*
Chooses the
WINS
configuration
mode.
Static
See Network User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
107
C
Level1
Level2
Level3
Level4
Options
Descriptions
Network
WLAN
TCP/IP
WINS Server
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Primary)
000.000.000.000
Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or
secondary WINS
server.
(Secondary)
000.000.000.000
DNS Server
(Primary)
000.000.000.000
(Secondary)
000.000.000.000
APIPA
On*
Off
IPv6
On
Off*
Automatically
allocates the IP
address from the
link-local address
range.
Enable or disable
IPv6 protocol for
a wireless LAN.
If you want to use
the IPv6 protocol,
visit
http://solutions.
brother.com/ for
more information.
Setup Wizard
—
—
You can
manually
configure your
print server for a
wireless network.
WPS/AOSS
—
—
You can easily
configure your
wireless network
settings using the
one-button push
method.
WPS w/PIN Code
—
—
You can easily
configure your
wireless network
settings using
WPS with a PIN
code.
See Network User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
108
Specifies the IP
address of the
primary or
secondary DNS
server.
Menu and features
Level1
Level2
Level3
Level4
Options
Descriptions
Network
WLAN
WLAN Status
Status
—
(Continued)
(Continued)
You can see the
current wireless
network status.
Signal
—
You can see the
current wireless
network signal
strength.
SSID
—
You can see the
current SSID.
Comm. Mode
—
You can see the
current
Communication
Mode.
MAC Address
—
—
You can see your
machine’s MAC
address.
E-mail/IFAX
Mail Address
—
—
(Available after
IFAX is
downloaded)
Enter the mail
address. (Up to
60 characters)
Setup Server
SMTP Server
Name
(Up to 30
characters)
Enter the SMTP
server address.
IP Address
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
SMTP Port
[00001-65535]
Enter the SMTP
port number.
Auth. for SMTP
None*
Selects the
Security method
for E-mail
notification.
SMTP-AUTH
POP bef. SMTP
POP3 Server
Name
(Up to 30
characters)
Enter the POP3
server address.
IP Address
[000-255].
[000-255].
C
[000-255].
[000-255]
POP3 Port
[00001-65535]
Enter the POP3
port number.
Mailbox Name
—
Enter the mail
box name. (Up to
20 characters)
See Network User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
109
Level1
Level2
Level3
Level4
Options
Descriptions
Network
E-mail/IFAX
Setup Server
Mailbox Pwd
—
(Continued)
(Available after
IFAX is
downloaded)
(Continued)
Enter the
password to login
to the POP3
server. (Up to
20 characters)
APOP
On
Enables or
disables APOP.
(Continued)
Off*
Setup Mail RX
Auto Polling
On*
Off
Poll Frequency
1 Min
(Available when
Auto Polling
is set to On.)
3 Mins
5 Mins
10 Mins*
Automatically
checks the POP3
server for new
messages.
Sets the interval
for checking for
new messages
on the POP3
server.
30 Mins
60 Mins
Header
All
Subject+From+
To
Selects the
contents of the
mail header to be
printed.
None*
Del Error Mail
On*
Off
Notification
On
MDN
Deletes error
mails
automatically.
Receives
notification
messages.
Off*
Setup Mail TX
Sender Subject
—
Displays the
subject that is
attached to the
Internet Fax data.
Size Limit
On
Limits the size of
E-mail
documents.
Off*
Notification
On
Off*
See Network User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
110
Sends
notification
messages.
Menu and features
Level1
Level2
Level3
Level4
Options
Descriptions
Network
E-mail/IFAX
Setup Relay
Rly Broadcast
On
(Continued)
(Available after
IFAX is
downloaded)
Relays a
document to
another fax
machine over the
Internet.
Off*
(Continued)
Relay Domain
—
Registers the
Domain name.
Relay Report
On
Prints the Relay
Broadcast
Report.
Off*
Time Zone
—
UTCXXX:XX
—
Sets the time
zone for your
country.
Network I/F
—
Wired LAN*
—
You can choose
the network
connection type.
—
Allows you to
search for
information such
as fax numbers
and E-mail
addresses on
your server.
—
Restore all
network settings
to factory default.
WLAN
LDAP
—
On
Off*
Network Reset
—
—
See Network User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
111
MENU (
) (continued)
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
Print Reports
Transmission
—
—
See 1 .
Help List
—
—
Prints these lists and
reports.
Quick Dial
—
Alphabetical
Order
Numerical Order
Fax Journal
—
—
User Settings
—
—
Network Config
—
—
WLAN Report
—
—
Caller ID hist.
—
—
Machine Info.
Serial No.
—
—
Lets you check the serial
number of your machine.
99
Initial Setup
Receive Mode
—
Fax Only*
Choose the Receive Mode
that best suits your needs.
35
See 2 .
Fax/Tel
External TAD
Manual
Date&Time
—
—
Puts the date and time on
the LCD and in headings
of faxes you send.
Station ID
—
Fax:
Enter your name and fax
number to appear on each
page you fax.
Name:
Tone/Pulse
—
(Canada only)
Dial Tone
Tone*
Pulse
—
Detection
No Detection*
Dial Prefix
—
On
Off*
Compatibility
—
High*
Normal
Basic(for VoIP)
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
2
See Quick Setup Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
112
Choose the dialing mode.
You can shorten the dial
tone detect pause.
98
Sets a prefix number that
will always be added
before the fax number
every time you dial.
See 1 .
Adjusts the modem speed
to help resolve
transmission problems.
98
Menu and features
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
Initial Setup
Reset
Network
—
Resets the print server
back to its factory default
settings, such as the
password and IP address
information.
99
Speed Dial&Fax
—
Deletes all stored
Speed Dial numbers and
faxes, restores the Station
ID, Quick Dial List,
Transmission Verification
Report and Fax Journal
back to the factory default
settings.
All Settings
—
Resets all the machine’s
settings back to the
settings that were set at
the factory.
—
English*
Allows you to change the
LCD language for your
country.
(Continued)
Local Language
(USA only)
Local Language
Spanish
—
(Canada only)
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
2
See Quick Setup Guide.
English*
French
See 2.
Allows you to change the
LCD language for your
country.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
113
FAX (
)
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
Call History
Outgoing Call
Send a fax
—
See 1 .
More
Add to Speed
Dial
You can choose a number
from the Outgoing Call
history and then make a
telephone call to it, send a
fax to it, add it to Speed Dial,
add it to One Touch Dial, or
delete it.
Add to One
Touch Dial
Delete
Caller ID hist.
Send a fax
—
More
Add to Speed
Dial
Add to One
Touch Dial
You can choose a number
from the Caller ID history and
then send a fax to it, add it to
Speed Dial, add it to
One Touch Dial, or delete it.
Delete
Phone Book
Fax Resolution
Send a fax
—
—
You can dial by pressing only
a few keys (and Start).
49
More
Set Speed Dial
—
You can store Speed Dial
numbers, so you can dial by
pressing only a few buttons
on the Touchscreen (and
Start).
51
Set One Touch
Dial
—
You can store One Touch
Dial numbers, so you can
dial by pressing only a few
keys (and Start).
50
Setup Groups
—
You can set up Group
numbers for Broadcasting.
See 1 .
Change
—
You can change One Touch
and Speed Dial numbers.
52
Delete
—
You can delete One Touch
and Speed Dial numbers.
—
Standard*
Sets the resolution for
outgoing faxes.
—
Fine
S.Fine
Photo
Duplex Fax
—
—
Off*
DuplexScan :
LongEdge
You can choose duplex fax
SCAN mode.
DuplexScan :
ShortEdge
Contrast
—
—
Auto*
Light
Dark
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
114
Changes the lightness or
darkness of faxes you send.
See 1 .
Menu and features
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
Glass Scan Size
—
—
Letter*
To fax a Legal, Ledger, A3 or
A4 size document, you'll
need to change the
Glass Scan Size setting.
33
Adjusts the volume level of
the speaker.
See 1.
Legal
Ledger
A4
A3
Volume
—
—
(Appears after
pressing Hook)
Off
Low
Med*
High
Broadcasting
Add Number
—
—
You can send the same fax
message to more than one
fax number.
—
On
You can preview a fax
message before send it.
33
Sets the time of day in
24-hour format that the
delayed faxes will be sent.
See 1.
Phone Book
Preview
—
Off*
Delayed Fax
—
—
On
Off*
Batch TX
—
—
On
Off*
Real Time TX
—
—
On
Off*
Polled TX
—
—
On
Off*
Polling RX
—
—
On
Off*
Overseas Mode
—
—
On
Off*
Set New Default
—
—
Fax Resolution
Contrast
Combines delayed faxes to
the same fax number at the
same time of day into one
transmission.
You can send a fax without
using the memory.
Sets up your machine with a
document to be retrieved by
another fax machine.
Sets up your machine to poll
another fax machine.
If you are having difficulty
sending faxes overseas, set
this to On.
You can save your fax
settings.
Glass Scan Size
Real Time TX
C
Preview
Factory Reset
—
1
—
—
You can restore all settings
to the factory settings.
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
115
SCAN (
)
Level1
Option1
Option2
Option3
Descriptions
Page
to File
—
—
—
You can scan a black & white
or a color document into your
computer.
See 1.
Duplex Scan
—
Off*
You can choose the duplex
SCAN mode.
DuplexScan :
LongEdge
DuplexScan :
ShortEdge
to Media
(when a memory
card or USB
Flash memory
drive is inserted)
Duplex Scan
—
Off*
DuplexScan :
LongEdge
You can choose the duplex
SCAN mode.
61
You can choose the scan
resolution and file format for
your document.
61
DuplexScan :
ShortEdge
Quality
—
Color 100 dpi
Color 200 dpi*
Color 300 dpi
Color 600 dpi
B/W 100 dpi
B/W 200 dpi
B/W 300 dpi
File Type
—
(If you choose
color option in
Quality setting)
PDF*
JPEG
(If you choose
B&W option in
Quality setting)
TIFF
PDF*
1
See Software User’s Guide.
2
See Advanced User’s Guide.
3
(Macintosh users)
This function is available after you have downloaded and installed Presto! PageManager from
http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
116
Menu and features
Level1
Option1
Option2
Option3
Descriptions
Page
to Media
(when a memory
card or USB
Flash memory
drive is inserted)
Glass Scan Size
—
Letter*
To scan a Legal, Ledger, A3
or A4 size document, you'll
need to change the
Glass Scan Size setting.
See 2 .
Legal
Ledger
A4
(Continued)
A3
File Name
—
—
You can rename the file.
61
Auto Crop
—
On
Scan multiple documents
placed on the scanner glass
to a memory card or USB
Flash memory drive one at a
time.
See 2 .
Off*
Set New Default
—
Quality
File Type
You can save your scan
settings as the default
settings.
Glass Scan
Size
Auto Crop
Factory Reset
—
—
You can restore all settings to
the original factory default
settings.
to Network
(Profile Name)
—
—
You can send scanned data
to a CIFS server on your local
network or on the Internet.
to FTP
(Profile Name)
—
—
You can send scanned data
via FTP.
to Email
PC
—
—
You can scan a black & white
or a color document into your
E-mail application.
E-mail server
Manual
—
(Available after
IFAX is
downloaded)
Phone Book
You can scan a black & white
or a color document into your
E-mail Server.
See 1 .
Manual: You can enter an
E-mail address using the
buttons on the LCD.
Phone Book: You can
search for an E-mail address
that you have stored in the
machine.
C
1
See Software User’s Guide.
2
See Advanced User’s Guide.
3
(Macintosh users)
This function is available after you have downloaded and installed Presto! PageManager from
http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
117
Level1
Option1
Option2
Option3
Descriptions
Page
to Email
E-mail server
Manual
Duplex Scan
See 1.
(Continued)
(Available after
IFAX is
downloaded)
Phone Book
(Options)
You can choose the duplex
SCAN mode.
(Continued)
Off*
(Continued)
DuplexScan :
LongEdge
DuplexScan :
ShortEdge
Quality
(Options)
Chooses the file format to
send the scanned data via
E-mail server.
Color 100 dpi
Color 200 dpi*
Color 300 dpi
Color 600 dpi
B/W 100 dpi
B/W 200 dpi
B/W 300 dpi
File Type
(Options)
(If you choose
color option in
Quality setting)
PDF*
JPEG
(If you choose
B&W option in
Quality setting)
TIFF
PDF*
1
See Software User’s Guide.
2
See Advanced User’s Guide.
3
(Macintosh users)
This function is available after you have downloaded and installed Presto! PageManager from
http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
118
Menu and features
Level1
Option1
Option2
Option3
Descriptions
Page
to Email
E-mail server
Manual
Glass Scan Size
See 1 .
(Continued)
(Available after
IFAX is
downloaded)
Phone Book
(Options)
(Continued)
Letter*
To scan a Legal, Ledger, A3
or A4 size document, you’ll
need to change the
Glass Scan Size setting.
Legal
(Continued)
Ledger
A4
A3
Set New Default
(Options)
You can save your scan
settings.
Quality
File Type
Glass Scan Size
to OCR 3
Factory Reset
You can restore all settings to
the factory settings.
—
—
—
You can have your text
document converted to an
editable text file.
Duplex Scan
—
Off*
You can choose the duplex
SCAN mode.
DuplexScan :
LongEdge
DuplexScan :
ShortEdge
to Image
—
—
—
You can scan a color picture
into your graphics
application.
Duplex Scan
—
Off*
You can choose the duplex
SCAN mode.
DuplexScan :
LongEdge
DuplexScan :
ShortEdge
1
See Software User’s Guide.
2
See Advanced User’s Guide.
3
(Macintosh users)
This function is available after you have downloaded and installed Presto! PageManager from
http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
119
C
COPY (
)
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
Quality
—
—
Fast
Choose the Copy resolution
for the next copy.
See 1 .
Choose the paper type that
matches the paper in the
tray.
55
Choose the paper size that
matches the paper in the
tray.
55
Choose the tray that will be
used for COPY mode.
56
See 1 .
Normal*
Best
Paper Type
—
—
Plain Paper*
Inkjet Paper
Brother BP71
Brother BP61
Other Glossy
Transparency
Paper Size
—
—
Letter*
Legal
Ledger
A4
A5 (tray #1 only)
A3
EXE
4"x6"
(tray #1 only)
Tray Select
—
—
Tray#1
Tray#2
Auto Select*
Enlarge/Reduce
100%*
—
—
—
Enlarge
—
198% 4"x6"iA4
You can choose the
enlargement ratio for the
next copy.
186% 4"x6"iLTR
130% LTRiLGR
104% EXEiLTR
Reduce
—
97% LTRiA4
93% A4iLTR
85% LTRiEXE
83% LGLiA4
78% LGLiLTR
64% LGRiLTR
46% LTRi4"x6"
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
120
You can choose the
reduction ratio for the next
copy.
Menu and features
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
Enlarge/Reduce
Fit to Page
—
—
Your machine will adjust
the size automatically to the
paper size you set.
See 1.
Custom(25-400%)
—
—
You can enter an
enlargement or reduction
ratio.
—
—
(Continued)
Density
Light
Dark
-2
Adjusts the density of
copies.
-1
0
+1
+2
Stack/Sort
—
—
Stack*
Sort
Page Layout
—
2in1(L)
If you choose
Ledger or A3:
(When 2 in 1 is
chosen)
2 in 1 (ID)
LGRx2 i LGRx1
4in1(P)
LTRx2 i LGRx1
4in1(L)
A3x2 i A3x1
1 to 2
A4x2 i A3x1
Poster (2 x 1)
(When poster 2x2
is chosen)
Off(1in1)*
2in1(P)
Poster (2 x 2)
Poster (3 x 3)
You can choose to stack or
sort multiple copies.
You can make N in 1, 2 in 1
ID, or Poster copies.
LGRx1 i LGRx4
LTRx1 i LGRx4
A3x1 i A3x4
A4x1 i A3x4
Skew Adjustment
—
—
Auto*
Off
1
If your scanned copy is
skewed, your machine can
correct the data
automatically.
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
121
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
Duplex Copy
—
—
Off*
You can choose the duplex
print settings.
See 1 .
2sidei2side
1sidei2side
LongEdgeFlip
2sidei1side
LongEdgeFlip
1sidei2side
ShortEdgeFlip
2sidei1side
ShortEdgeFlip
More
Advanced
Normal*
DX1
DX2
Advanced Settings
—
A3/LGR Duplex
Copy Setting
Fit to Page*
—
Off*
Keep Scale
Ink Save Mode
Thin Paper Copy
You can choose various
settings for copy such as
Book Copy and
Watermark Copy.
Book Copy
Watermark Copy
Favorite Settings
Store
—
Rename
Favorite:1
Favorite:2
Favorite:3
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
122
You can save your Favorite
settings.
Menu and features
Watermark Copy Settings
Option1
Option2
Option3
Option4
Descriptions
Page
Edit Template
Text
—
CONFIDENTIAL*
Uses a template to place
text into your document as
a Watermark.
See 1.
DRAFT
COPY
Position
A
B
C
D
E*
F
G
H
I
Pattern
Size
Small
Medium*
Large
Angle
-90
-45*
0
+45
+90
Transparency
-2
-1
0*
+1
+2
Color
Black*
Green
Blue
C
Purple
Red
Orange
Yellow
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
123
Option1
Option2
Option3
Option4
Descriptions
Page
Use Image
Scan
Transparency
-2
You can choose the level of
transparency of the
watermark as you scan it
from a paper document.
See 1.
(Set watermark
document and
press Start.)
-1
0*
+1
+2
Media
Position
(Select image
from media)
A
B
C
D
E*
F
G
H
I
Pattern
Size
Small
Medium*
Large
Angle
-90
-45*
0
+45
+90
Transparency
-2
-1
0*
+1
+2
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
124
Places a logo or text into
your document as a
Watermark using an image
from removable media.
Menu and features
PHOTO CAPTURE (
Level1
)
Level2
Level3
View Photo(s)
(Print All Photos)
(Auto Correct)
Options
Descriptions
Page
See the print
settings in the
following table.
You can print all photos in
your memory card or USB
Flash memory drive.
60
The machine starts a Slide
Show of your photos.
(Slide Show)
Enhance Photo
The machine decides the
appropriate effect for your
photo.
Enhance
(Auto Correct)
See the print
settings in the
following table.
See 1.
You can adjust your photos
with these settings.
(Enhance Skin)
(Enhance Scenery)
(Remove Red-Eye)
(Night Scene)
(Fill Light)
(Whiteboard)
(Monochrome)
(Sepia)
C
(Auto Correct &
Remove Red-Eye)
Trim
1
—
You can trim your photo
and print a part of the
image.
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
125
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
Index Print
Index Sheet
6 Images/Line*
See the print
settings in the
following table.
You can print a thumbnail
page.
See 1 .
5 Images/Line
Print Photos
1
—
You can print an individual
image.
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Print Settings
Option1
Option2
Option3
Option4
Descriptions
Page
Print Quality
Normal
—
—
Choose the print quality.
See 1.
(Does not appear
when DPOF Print
is chosen.)
Photo*
Paper Type
Plain Paper
—
—
Choose the paper type.
(When A4 or
Letter is chosen)
—
Choose the paper and print
size.
—
Adjusts the brightness.
Inkjet Paper
Brother BP71
Brother BP61
Other Glossy*
Paper Size
4"x 6"*
5"x 7"
3"x 4"
Letter
3.5"x 5"
Ledger
4"x 6"
A4
5"x 7"
A3
6"x 8"
Max. Size*
Brightness
Dark
(Does not appear
when Enhance is
chosen.)
Light
—
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
126
Menu and features
Option1
Option2
Contrast
(Does not appear
when Enhance is
chosen.)
Option3
Option4
Descriptions
Page
—
—
Adjusts the contrast.
See 1.
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
True2Life
(Does not appear
when Enhance is
chosen.)
On
White Balance
-2
Off*
Adjusts the hue of the white
areas.
-1
0
+1
+2
Sharpness
-2
Enhances the detail of the
image.
-1
0
+1
+2
Color Density
-2
Adjusts the total amount of
color in the image.
-1
0
+1
+2
Cropping
On*
—
—
Crops the image around the
margin to fit the paper size
or print size. Turn this
feature off if you want to
print whole images or
prevent unwanted
cropping.
—
—
Expands the printable area
to fit the edges of the paper.
—
—
Prints the date on your
photo.
Off
Borderless
On*
Off
Print Date
On
(Does not appear
when DPOF Print
is chosen.)
Off*
1
C
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
127
Option1
Option2
Option3
Option4
Descriptions
Page
Set New Default
Print Quality
—
—
You can save your print
settings.
See 1.
—
—
You can restore all the
settings to factory settings.
Paper Type
Paper Size
Brightness
Contrast
True2Life
Cropping
Borderless
Print Date
Factory Reset
—
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Phone Book (
)
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
Phone Book
Send a fax
—
—
You can dial by pressing
only a few keys (and Start).
49
More
Set Speed Dial
—
You can set up Speed Dial
numbers, so you can dial by
pressing only a few buttons
on the Touchscreen (and
Start).
51
Set One Touch
Dial
—
You can store your most
frequently called numbers
on the One Touch keys.
50
Setup Groups
—
You can set up Group
numbers for Broadcasting.
See 1 .
Change
—
You can change
One Touch Dial and
Speed Dial numbers.
52
Delete
—
You can delete One Touch
Dial and Speed Dial
numbers.
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
128
Menu and features
Call History (
)
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
Call History
Outgoing Call
Send a fax
—
See 1.
More
Add to Speed
Dial
You can choose a number
from the Outgoing Call
history and then make a
telephone call to it, send a
fax to it, add it to One Touch
Dial, add it to Speed Dial, or
delete it.
Add to One
Touch Dial
Delete
Caller ID hist.
Send a fax
—
More
Add to Speed
Dial
Add to One
Touch Dial
You can choose a number
from the Caller ID history
and then send a fax to it,
add it to One Touch Dial,
add it to Speed Dial, or
delete it.
Delete
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Fax Preview (
)
Level1
Level2
Level3
Options
Descriptions
Page
Fax Preview
—
—
On
You can view faxes you
receive on the LCD screen.
39
Off*
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
129
Entering Text
C
When you are setting certain menu selections, you may need to enter text into the machine.
Press
to cycle between letters, numbers and special characters. Up to four letters are
assigned to each letter button on the LCD. By pressing the proper button repeatedly, you can
access the character you want.
Inserting spaces
To enter a space, press
C
to choose special characters, then press the space button
or
.
Note
The characters available may differ depending on your country.
Making corrections
C
If you entered an incorrect character and want to change it, use the arrow buttons to move the
cursor under the incorrect character. Then press
. Re-enter the correct character. You can also
insert letters by moving the cursor and entering a character.
Repeating letters
If you need to enter a character that is on the same button as the letter before it, press c to move
the cursor to the right before you press the same button again.
130
C
D
Specifications
D
General
D
Note
This chapter provides a summary of the machines’ specifications. For additional specifications
visit http://www.brother.com/ for details.
Printer Type
Inkjet
Print Method
Black:
Piezo with 210  1 nozzle
Color:
Piezo with 210  3 nozzles
Memory Capacity
192 MB
LCD (Liquid Crystal
Display)
Touchscreen 3.3 in. (82.8 mm) TFT Color LCD 1
Power Source
AC 100 to 120 V 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption 2
Copy Mode:
Approx. 28 W 3
Ready Mode:
Approx. 8 W
Sleep Mode:
Approx. 4 W
Off:
Approx. 0.3 W
1
Measured diagonally.
2
Measured when the machine is connected to the USB interface.
3
When using ADF, single-side printing and scanning, resolution: standard / document: ISO/IEC 24712 printed pattern.
D
131
Dimensions
13 in.
(331 mm)
21.3 in.
(540 mm)
19.3 in.
(489 mm)
23.2 in.
(590 mm)
26.3 in.
(669 mm)
Weight
40.8 lb (18.5 kg)
Noise
Operating:
50 dB or less 1
Temperature
Operating:
50 to 95 F (10 to 35 C)
Best Print Quality:
68 to 91 F (20 to 33 C)
Operating:
20 to 80% (without condensation)
Best Print Quality:
20 to 80% (without condensation)
Humidity
ADF (automatic document
feeder)
Up to 35 pages
Document Size
ADF Width: 5.8 in. to 11.7 in. (148 mm to 297 mm)
Paper: 20 lb (80 g/m2) Letter or A4 size
ADF Length: 5.8 in. to 17 in. (148 mm to 431.8 mm)
Scanner Glass Width: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)
Scanner Glass Length: Max. 17 in. (431.8 mm)
1
Noise depends on printing conditions.
132
Specifications
Print media
Paper Input
D
Paper Tray #1
 Paper Type:
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper (coated paper),
Glossy Paper 1 and Transparency 1 2
 Paper Size:
Letter, Ledger, A3, Legal, Executive, A4, A5, A6, JIS B4, JIS B5,
Envelopes (commercial No.10, DL, C5, Monarch, Y4), Photo 4"  6",
Photo L 3.5"  5", Photo 2L 5"  7", Index Card and PostCard 3
Width: 3.5 in. - 11.7 in. (89 mm - 297 mm)
Length: 5.0 in. - 17.0 in. (127 mm - 431.8 mm)
For more details, see Paper weight and thickness on page 27.
 Maximum paper tray capacity:
Approx. 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2) plain paper
Paper Tray #2
 Paper Type:
Plain Paper
 Paper Size:
Letter, Ledger, A3, Legal, Executive, A4, JIS B4, JIS B5
Width: 7.2 in. - 11.7 in. (182 mm - 297 mm)
Length: 10.1 in. - 17.0 in. (257 mm - 431.8 mm)
For more details, see Paper weight and thickness on page 27.
 Maximum paper tray capacity:
Approx. 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2) plain paper
1
For glossy paper or transparencies, remove printed pages from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the
machine to avoid smudging.
2
Use only transparencies recommended for inkjet printing.
3
See Paper type and size for each operation on page 26.
D
133
Paper Input
(Continued)
Manual Feed Slot
 Paper Type:
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper (coated paper), Glossy Paper 1,
Transparency 1 2, Envelopes and Labels
 Paper Size:
Letter, Ledger, A3, Legal, Executive, A4, A5, A6, JIS B4, JIS B5,
Envelopes (commercial No.10, DL, C5, Monarch, Y4), Photo 4"  6",
Photo L 3.5"  5", Photo 2L 5"  7", Index Card and PostCard 3
Width: 3.5 in. - 11.7 in. (89 mm - 297 mm)
Length: 5.0 in. - 17.0 in. (127 mm - 431.8 mm)
For more details, see Paper weight and thickness on page 27.
 Maximum paper tray capacity:
1 sheet of special print media
Paper Output
Up to 50 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2) plain paper (face up print delivery to the
output paper tray) 1
1
For glossy paper or transparencies, remove printed pages from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the
machine to avoid smudging.
2
Use only transparencies recommended for inkjet printing.
3
See Paper type and size for each operation on page 26.
134
Specifications
Fax
D
Compatibility
ITU-T Super Group 3
Duplex Fax Send (2-sided)
Yes. Up to Legal size document (ADF)
Modem Speed
Automatic Fallback
33,600 bps
Scanning Width
(Single-sided document)
11.3 in. (288 mm) (A3)
Scanning Width and Length
(Duplex (2-sided) document)
Width: 8.2 in. (208 mm) (Letter/Legal/A4) (ADF)
Printing Width
11.5 in. (291 mm) (A3)
Gray Scale
Levels: 64 (B&W) / 256 (Color)
Resolution
Standard
Length: 13.8 in. (349.6 mm) (ADF)
203  98 dpi (Black)
203  196 dpi (Color)
Fine
203  196 dpi (Black/Color)
Superfine
203  392 dpi (Black)
Photo
203  196 dpi (Black)
1
One Touch Dial
16 (8  2)
Speed Dial
100 stations  2 numbers
Groups
Up to 6
Broadcasting
266 (200 Speed Dial/16 One Touch Dial/ 50 Manual Dial)
Automatic Redial
1 time after 5 minutes
Memory Transmission
Up to 400 1 pages
Out of Paper Reception
Up to 400 1 pages
“Pages” refers to the “ITU-T Test Chart #1” (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, MMR code). Specifications
and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.
D
135
Copy
D
Color/Black
Yes/Yes
Copy Width
Max. 11.46 in. (291 mm)
Multiple Copies
Stacks/Sorts up to 99 pages
Enlarge/Reduce
25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)
Resolution
Prints up to 1200  1200 dpi
Duplex (2-sided)
Yes. Up to Legal size document (ADF) 1
 Paper Type:
Plain paper
 Paper Size:
Letter, Ledger 2, A3 2, Legal, A4, A5, Executive
1
Manual duplex is available for Ledger and A3 documents using the scanner glass.
2
Minimum top and bottom margins of 0.87 in. (22 mm)
136
Specifications
PhotoCapture Center™
D
Compatible Media 1
Memory Stick™ (16 MB - 128 MB)
Memory Stick PRO™ (256 MB - 32 GB)
(Not available for music data with MagicGate™)
Memory Stick Duo™ (16 MB - 128 MB)
Memory Stick PRO Duo™ (256 MB - 32 GB)
Memory Stick Micro™ (M2™) with Adapter
MultiMedia Card (32 MB - 2 GB)
MultiMedia Card plus (128 MB - 4 GB)
MultiMedia Card mobile with Adapter (64 MB - 1 GB)
SD (16 MB to 2 GB)
miniSD with Adapter
microSD with Adapter
SDHC (4 GB to 32 GB)
miniSDHC with Adapter
microSDHC with Adapter
USB Flash memory drive 2
Resolution
Up to 1200  2400 dpi
File Extension
(Media Format)
DPOF (ver. 1.0, ver. 1.1), Exif DCF (up to ver. 2.1)
(Image Format)
Photo Print: JPEG 3, AVI 4, MOV 4
Scan to Media: JPEG, PDF (Color)
TIFF, PDF (Black & White)
Color Enhancement
True2Life™
Photo Enhance
Auto Correct, Enhance Skin, Enhance Scenery, Trimming,
Slide Show, Remove Red-eye, Night Scene, Fill Light,
Whiteboard, Monochrome and Sepia
Number of Files
Up to 999 files
(The folder inside memory cards or USB Flash memory drive is
also counted.)
Folder
File must be stored in the 4th folder level of the memory card or
USB Flash memory drive.
Borderless
Letter, A4, Ledger, A3, Photo 4"  6", Photo 2L 5"  7" 5
1
Memory cards, adapters and USB Flash memory drive are not included.
2
USB 2.0 Standard
USB Mass Storage standard from 16 MB to 32 GB
Support format: FAT12/FAT16/FAT32
3
Progressive JPEG format is not supported.
4
Motion JPEG only
5
See Paper type and size for each operation on page 26.
D
137
PictBridge
Compatibility
D
Supports the Camera & Imaging Products Association
PictBridge standard CIPA DC-001.
Visit http://www.cipa.jp/pictbridge/ for more information.
Interface
138
USB direct interface
Specifications
Scanner
D
Color/Black
Yes/Yes
Duplex (2-sided)
Yes. Up to Legal size document (ADF)
TWAIN Compliant
Yes (Windows® 2000 Professional/Windows® XP/
Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition/Windows Vista®/
Windows® 7)
Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.x, 10.6.x 1
WIA Compliant
Yes (Windows® XP 2/Windows Vista®/Windows® 7)
ICA Compliant
Yes (Mac OS X 10.6.x)
Color Depth
48 bit color Processing (Input)
24 bit color Processing (Output)
(Actual Input: 30 bit color/Actual Output: 24 bit color)
Resolution
Up to 19200  19200 dpi (interpolated) 3
Up to 2400  2400 dpi (optical) (Scanner Glass)
Up to 2400  1200 dpi (optical) (Single-sided document from
ADF)
Up to 600  600 dpi (optical) (Duplex (2-sided) document from
ADF)
Scanning Width and Length
(Single-sided document)
Width: Up to 11.46 in. (291 mm)
Scanning Width and Length
(Duplex (2-sided) document)
Width: Up to 8.3 in. (210 mm) (Letter/Legal/A4) (ADF)
Gray Scale
256 levels
Length: Up to 16.77 in. (426 mm)
Length: Up to 13.8 in. (349.6 mm) (ADF)
1
For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.
2
Windows® XP in this User’s Guide includes Windows® XP Home Edition, Windows® XP Professional, and Windows®
XP Professional x64 Edition.
3
Maximum 1200  1200 dpi scanning when using the WIA Driver for Windows® XP, Windows Vista® and Windows® 7
(resolution up to 19200  19200 dpi can be selected by using the Brother scanner utility).
D
139
Printer
D
Resolution
Up to 1200  6000 dpi
Printing Width
10.76 in. [11 in. (borderless) 1] 3
Borderless
Letter, A4, Ledger, A3, A6, Photo 4"  6",
Index Card 5"  8"
Photo L 3.5"  5", Photo 2L 5"  7" 2
Duplex (2-sided)
 Paper Type:
Plain paper
 Paper Size:
Letter, A4, Ledger 4, A3 4, Legal, A5, A6, Executive
Print Speed 5
1
When the Borderless feature is set to On.
2
See Paper type and size for each operation on page 26.
3
When printing on Ledger size paper.
4
Minimum top and bottom margins of 0.87 in. (22 mm)
5
For detailed specifications visit http://www.brother.com/.
140
Specifications
Interfaces
D
USB 1 2
Use a USB 2.0 interface cable that is no longer than 6 feet (2 m).
LAN 3
Use an Ethernet UTP cable category 5 or greater.
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Infrastructure/Ad-hoc Mode)
1
Your machine has a USB 2.0 Hi-Speed interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a USB
1.1 interface.
2
Third party USB ports are not supported.
3
See Network (LAN) on page 144 and the Network User’s Guide for detailed network specifications.
D
141
Computer requirements
D
SUPPORTED OPERATING SYSTEMS AND SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS
Computer Platform &
Operating System Version
Windows®
Operating
System 1
Windows® 2000
Professional 6
Windows® XP Home 2 5
Windows® XP
Professional 2 5
Windows® XP
Professional x64 Edition 2
Supported
PC Software
Functions
PC
Interface
7
Intel® Pentium® 4
or equivalent
®
Printing
Windows Server® 2003
x64 Edition (print only
via network)
10/100
Base-TX
(Ethernet),
Wireless
802.11b/g/n
Intel® Pentium® III
or equivalent
For
Applications
Intel® Pentium®III
or equivalent
Windows Server® 2003
R2 x64 Edition (print
only via network)
64-bit (Intel® 64
or AMD64)
supported CPU
Windows Server® 2008
(print only via network)
Intel® Pentium® 4
or equivalent 64-bit
(Intel® 64 or AMD64)
supported CPU
Windows Server® 2008
R2 (print only via network)
64-bit (Intel® 64 or
AMD64) supported CPU
Printing,
PC Fax
Send 4,
Scanning,
Removable
Disk 7
USB 3,
10/100
Base-TX
(Ethernet),
Wireless
802.11b/g/n
512 MB
1 GB
500 MB 1.2 GB
1 GB
1 GB 650 MB
(32 bit) (32 bit)
2 GB
2 GB
(64 bit) (64 bit)
256 MB 512 MB
50 MB
N/A
80 MB
400 MB
64-bit (Intel® 64
or AMD64)
supported CPU
Windows Server® 2003
R2 (print only via network)
Mac OS X 10.6.x
For
Drivers
USB,
Intel® Pentium® II 64 MB 256 MB 150 MB 500 MB
PC Fax , 10/100
or equivalent
Scanning, Base-TX
128 MB
Removable (Ethernet),
Wireless
Disk 7
802.11b/g/n
64-bit (Intel® 64 or
256 MB 512 MB
AMD64) supported CPU
64-bit (Intel 64
or AMD64)
supported CPU
Macintosh Mac OS X
Operating 10.4.11, 10.5.x
System
Hard Disk Space to install
4
25
Windows Server® 2003
(print only via network)
Minimum Recommended
RAM
RAM
Printing,
Windows Vista® 2 5
Windows®
Processor
Minimum
Speed
512 MB
2 GB
PowerPC® G4/G5 512 MB
Intel® Core™
Processor
Intel® Core™
Processor
1 GB
1 GB
1 GB
2 GB
Conditions:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
142
Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 5.5 or greater.
For WIA, 1200  1200 resolution. Brother Scanner
Utility enables to enhance up to 19200  19200 dpi.
Third party USB ports are not supported.
PC Fax supports black and white only.
PaperPort™12SE supports Windows® XP (SP3 or higher),
Windows Vista® (SP2 or higher) and Windows® 7.
PaperPort™11SE supports Microsoft® SP4 or higher
for Windows® 2000 (Available from the internet).
Removable disk is a function of PhotoCapture Center™.
For the latest driver updates, visit us at
(in USA)
www.brother.com/
(in Canada)
www.brother.ca/
All trademarks, brand and product names are the
property of their respective companies.
Specifications
Consumable items
D
Ink
The machine uses individual Black, Yellow, Cyan and Magenta ink
cartridges that are separate from the print head assembly.
Service Life of Ink
Cartridge
Starter ink cartridges are in the box. The first time you install the ink
cartridges the machine will use extra ink to fill the ink delivery tubes.
This is a one-time process that enables high quality printing.
Afterward, replacement ink cartridges will print the specified
number of pages. Starter cartridge yield is approx. 65% of the yield
of the LC75 replacement cartridges.
Replacement
Consumables
<Super High Yield Black> LC79BK
<Super High Yield Yellow> LC79Y
<Super High Yield Cyan> LC79C
<Super High Yield Magenta> LC79M
Black - Approximately 2,400 pages 1
Yellow, Cyan and Magenta - Approximately 1,200 pages 1
<High Yield Black> LC75BK
<High Yield Yellow> LC75Y
<High Yield Cyan> LC75C
<High Yield Magenta> LC75M
Black, Yellow, Cyan and Magenta - Approximately 600 pages 1
1
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 24711
For more information about the replacement consumables, visit us
at www.brother.com/pageyield/.
What is Innobella™?
Innobella™ is a range of genuine consumables offered by Brother.
The name "Innobella™" derives from the words "Innovation" and
"Bella" (meaning "Beautiful" in Italian) and is a representation of the
"innovative" technology providing you with "beautiful" and "long
lasting" print results.
When you print photo images, Brother recommends Innobella™
glossy photo paper (BP71 series) for high quality. Brilliant prints are
made easier with Innobella™ Ink and paper.
D
143
Network (LAN)
D
Note
For details about the full Network specifications, see the Network User’s Guide.
LAN
You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,
Network Scanning, PC Fax Send, PC Fax Receive (Windows® only),
Remote Setup, and access photos from PhotoCapture Center™ 1.
Also included is Brother BRAdmin Light 2 Network Management
software.
Wireless Network
Security
SSID (32 chr), WEP 64/128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES),
WPA2-PSK (AES)
Setup Support Utility
AOSS™
Yes
WPS
Yes
1
See the Computer Requirements chart on page 142.
2
If you require more advanced printer management, use the latest Brother BRAdmin Professional utility version that is
available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com/.
144
E
Index
E
A
D
Accessories and supplies .......................... ii
ADF (automatic document feeder) ...........28
Answering machine (TAD) .......................45
connecting ............................................46
Apple Macintosh
See Software User's Guide.
Automatic
fax receive ............................................35
Easy Receive .....................................39
Data Ident-A-Call ..................................... 42
Dialing
a pause ................................................ 50
manual ................................................. 49
One Touch ........................................... 49
Speed Dial ............................................ 49
Distinctive Ring ........................................ 43
setting ring pattern ............................... 44
turning off ............................................. 44
Document
loading ............................................ 28, 29
Duplex (2-sided)
Scan to Media ...................................... 61
B
Brother
accessories and supplies ........................ ii
Brother numbers ...................................... i
CreativeCenter ........................................4
Customer Service .................................... i
FAQs (frequently asked questions) ......... i
Notice - Disclaimer ................................. iv
product support ........................................ i
service centers ......................................... i
Solutions Center ...................................... i
C
Cleaning
print head ..............................................68
scanner .................................................67
Connecting
external TAD
(answering machine) ..................... 45, 46
external telephone ................................47
Consumable items .................................143
Control panel overview ..............................6
ControlCenter
See Software User's Guide.
Copy
paper size .............................................55
paper type .............................................55
tray use .................................................22
using ADF .............................................28
using scanner glass ..............................29
Cordless telephone (non-Brother) ............48
Custom Ringing .......................................43
Custom telephone features on a single
line ...........................................................94
E
Easy Receive .......................................... 39
Envelopes ............................. 17, 19, 26, 27
Error messages on LCD .......................... 71
B&W Print Only .................................... 71
Cannot Detect ...................................... 72
Cannot Print ......................................... 72
Comm. Error ......................................... 72
Cover is Open ...................................... 72
Data Remaining ................................... 72
Document Jam ..................................... 72
DR Mode in Use ................................... 73
Ink Absorber Full .................................. 73
Ink Absorber NearFull .......................... 74
Ink Low ................................................. 74
No Ink Cartridge ................................... 74
No Paper Fed ....................................... 75
Not Registered ............................... 49, 75
Out of Memory ..................................... 76
Paper Jam ............................................ 76
Unable to Clean ................................... 77
Unable to Init. ....................................... 77
Unable to Print ..................................... 77
Unable to Scan ..................................... 77
Wrong Paper Size ................................ 78
Wrong Tray Setting .............................. 78
Extension telephone, using ..................... 48
External telephone, connecting ............... 47
145
F
I
Fax codes
changing ...............................................48
Fax Receive Code ................... 39, 47, 48
Telephone Answer Code ............... 47, 48
using .....................................................48
Fax, from PC
See Software User's Guide.
Fax, stand-alone
receiving ................................................35
difficulties .................................... 91, 92
Easy Receive .....................................39
F/T Ring Time, setting ........................38
Fax Preview ................................ 39, 41
from extension telephone ............ 47, 48
from external telephone .....................47
Ring Delay, setting .............................38
telephone line interference / VoIP ......98
tray use ..............................................23
sending .................................................31
change scanner glass size .................33
color fax .............................................33
difficulties ...........................................93
Fax Preview .......................................33
telephone line interference / VoIP ......98
Transmission Verification Report .......34
Fax/Tel mode
answering at extension
telephones ..................................... 47, 48
Fax Receive Code ......................... 47, 48
Ring Delay ............................................38
Telephone Answer Code ............... 47, 48
Ident-A-Call ............................................. 42
Ident-A-Ring ............................................ 42
Ink cartridges
ink dot counter ...................................... 65
replacing ............................................... 65
Innobella™ ............................................ 143
G
Gray scale ..................................... 135, 139
H
Help
LCD messages ...................................100
Menu Table .........................................101
Hook key ....................................................6
146
J
Jams
document .............................................. 80
paper .................................................... 81
L
Labels ................................... 17, 25, 26, 27
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) ............. 7, 100
M
Macintosh
See Software User's Guide.
Maintenance, routine
replacing ink cartridges ........................ 65
Manual
dialing ................................................... 49
receive .................................................. 35
Manual feed slot ...................................... 17
Mode, entering
Copy ....................................................... 6
Fax ......................................................... 6
PhotoCapture ......................................... 6
Scan ....................................................... 6
Multi-line connections (PBX) ................... 46
N
Network
Printing
See Network User's Guide.
Scanning
See Software User's Guide.
O
Q
One Touch
changing ...............................................52
deleting .................................................52
setting up ..............................................50
using .....................................................49
Quick Dial ................................................ 50
One Touch Dial
changing ............................................ 52
deleting .............................................. 52
setting up ........................................... 50
using .................................................. 49
Pause ................................................... 50
Speed Dial
changing ............................................ 52
deleting .............................................. 52
setting up ........................................... 51
using .................................................. 49
P
Paper ...................................... 24, 133, 134
capacity .................................................27
loading ..................................... 10, 13, 19
loading envelopes and postcards .........19
printable area ........................................21
size .......................................................22
size of document ...................................28
type ................................................ 22, 26
PaperPort™12SE with OCR
See Software User's Guide. See also Help
in the PaperPort™12SE application.
Personalized Ring ....................................43
PhotoCapture Center™
from PC
See Software User's Guide.
Memory Stick PRO™ ............................57
Memory Stick™ ....................................57
MultiMedia Card ....................................57
Preview photos .....................................60
Print settings
Quality ................................................61
Printing
all photos ...........................................60
Scan to Media
change file name ...............................61
SD .........................................................57
SDHC ....................................................57
Slide-Show ............................................60
specifications ......................................137
Presto! PageManager
See Software User's Guide. See also Help
in the Presto! PageManager application.
Print
difficulties ..............................................88
printable area ........................................21
resolution ............................................140
specifications ......................................140
Printing
See Software User's Guide.
Programming your machine ...................100
R
Receive Mode
External TAD ........................................ 35
Fax Only ............................................... 35
Fax/Tel ................................................. 35
Manual ................................................. 35
Redial/Pause ........................................... 50
Remote Setup
See Software User's Guide.
Resolution
copy .................................................... 136
fax ...................................................... 135
print .................................................... 140
scan .................................................... 139
Ring Delay, setting .................................. 38
RingMaster .............................................. 43
S
Scanning
See Software User's Guide.
Serial Number
how to find ...............See inside front cover
SimpleBiz Fax & Alternative Number
Ringing .................................................... 42
Smart Ring .............................................. 43
Speed Dial
changing ............................................... 52
deleting ................................................. 52
setting up .............................................. 51
using ..................................................... 49
147
E
T
W
TAD (telephone answering device),
external ............................................. 35, 45
connecting ...................................... 45, 46
Receive Mode .......................................35
recording OGM .....................................46
Teen Ring ................................................42
Telephone line
connections ...........................................46
difficulties ..............................................91
interference / VoIP ................................98
multi-line (PBX) .....................................46
Text, entering .........................................130
Transferring your faxes or
Fax Journal report ....................................79
Transparencies ....24, 25, 26, 27, 133, 134
Tray Select key ........................................56
Troubleshooting .......................................88
document jam .......................................80
error messages on LCD ........................71
if you are having difficulty
copying ...............................................94
incoming calls ....................................94
Network ..............................................96
phone line or connections ..................91
PhotoCapture Center™ .....................96
printing ...............................................88
printing received faxes .......................91
receiving faxes ...................................92
scanning .............................................95
software .............................................95
Touchscreen ......................................97
maintenance messages on LCD ...........71
paper jam ..............................................81
Warranties (Printed / In the box)
Notice-Disclaimer ...................................iv
Windows®
See Software User's Guide.
Wireless Network
See Quick Setup Guide and Network
User's Guide.
World Wide Web .........................................i
U
Unscannable area ....................................30
V
Voice Mail ................................................42
148
Brother International Corporation
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.
1 rue Hôtel de Ville,
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, Canada H9B 3H6
Visit us on the World Wide Web
http://www.brother.com/
This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or their
dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.
ADVANCED
USER’S GUIDE
MFC-J6910DW
Version 0
USA/CAN
User's Guides and where do I find it?
Which manual?
i
What's in it?
Where is it?
Safety and Legal
Read this Guide first. Please read the Safety
Instructions before you set up your machine.
See this Guide for trademarks and legal
limitations.
Printed / In the box
Quick Setup Guide
Follow the instructions for setting up your
machine and installing the drivers and software
for the operating system and connection type
you are using.
Printed / In the box
Basic User's Guide
Learn the basic Fax, Copy, Scan and
PhotoCapture Center™ operations and how to
replace consumables. See troubleshooting tips.
Printed / In the box
Advanced User's Guide
Learn more advanced operations: Fax, Copy,
security features, printing reports and
performing routine maintenance.
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
Software User's Guide
Follow these instructions for Printing, Scanning,
Network Scanning, PhotoCapture Center™,
Remote Setup, PC-Fax, and using the Brother
ControlCenter utility.
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
Network Glossary
This Guide provides basic information about
advanced network features of Brother
machines along with explanations about
general networking and common terms.
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
Network User's Guide
This Guide provides useful information about
wired and wireless network settings and
security settings using the Brother machine.
You can also find supported protocol
information for your machine and detailed
troubleshooting tips.
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
Table of Contents
1
General setup
1
Memory storage.....................................................................................................1
Volume Settings.....................................................................................................1
Ring Volume ....................................................................................................1
Beeper Volume................................................................................................2
Speaker Volume ..............................................................................................2
Automatic Daylight Saving Time............................................................................3
Sleep Mode ...........................................................................................................3
LCD screen............................................................................................................4
Setting the backlight brightness.......................................................................4
Setting the Dim Timer for the backlight ...........................................................4
Dial Prefix ..............................................................................................................4
Setting up or changing the prefix number........................................................4
Mode Timer............................................................................................................5
2
Security features
6
Secure Function Lock 2.0 ......................................................................................6
Before you begin to use Secure Function Lock 2.0.........................................6
Setting and changing the Administrator Password..........................................7
Setting up restricted users...............................................................................8
Turning Secure Function Lock on/off...............................................................8
Switching users ...............................................................................................9
Changing to the Public mode ..........................................................................9
3
Sending a fax
10
Additional sending options...................................................................................10
Sending faxes using multiple settings ........................................................... 10
Stop faxing..................................................................................................... 10
Contrast ......................................................................................................... 10
Changing fax resolution.................................................................................11
Setting your changes as the new default....................................................... 11
Restoring fax settings to the factory settings................................................. 11
Additional sending operations.............................................................................. 12
Sending a duplex (2-sided) fax from the ADF ............................................... 12
Sending a fax manually .................................................................................12
Sending a fax at the end of a conversation ...................................................13
Dual Access (Black & White only) .................................................................13
Broadcasting (Black & White only) ................................................................ 13
Real Time Transmission................................................................................ 15
Overseas Mode .............................................................................................15
Delayed Faxing (Black & White only) ............................................................15
Delayed Batch Transmission (Black & White only) .......................................16
Checking and canceling waiting jobs............................................................. 16
Polling overview................................................................................................... 17
Polled Transmit (Black & White only) ............................................................17
ii
4
Receiving a fax
18
Memory Receive (Black & White only) ................................................................18
Receiving faxes into memory when paper tray is empty ...............................18
Fax Forwarding..............................................................................................18
Paging ...........................................................................................................19
Fax Storage ...................................................................................................20
Printing a fax from the memory .....................................................................20
PC-Fax Receive (Windows® only).................................................................21
Turning off Memory Receive operations........................................................22
Changing Memory Receive operations .........................................................22
Remote Retrieval .................................................................................................23
Setting a Remote Access Code.....................................................................23
Using your Remote Access Code..................................................................23
Remote Fax commands ................................................................................24
Retrieving fax messages ...............................................................................25
Changing your Fax Forwarding number ........................................................25
Additional receiving operations............................................................................26
Printing a reduced incoming fax ....................................................................26
Receiving a fax at the end of a conversation.................................................26
Polling overview...................................................................................................27
Polling receive ...............................................................................................27
5
Dialing and storing numbers
29
Voice operations ..................................................................................................29
Tone or Pulse (Canada only).........................................................................29
Fax/Tel mode.................................................................................................29
Caller ID.........................................................................................................29
Special line considerations ............................................................................30
Additional dialing operations................................................................................32
Outgoing Call.................................................................................................32
Caller ID history .............................................................................................32
Dialing access codes and credit card numbers .............................................33
Additional ways to store numbers ........................................................................34
Storing One Touch numbers from Outgoing Calls.........................................34
Storing One Touch numbers from the Caller ID history.................................34
Storing Speed Dial numbers from Outgoing Calls.........................................35
Storing Speed Dial numbers from the Caller ID history .................................36
Setting up groups for Broadcasting ...............................................................37
6
Printing reports
39
Fax reports...........................................................................................................39
Transmission Verification Report...................................................................39
Fax Journal (activity report) ...........................................................................39
Reports ................................................................................................................40
How to print a report ......................................................................................40
iii
7
Making copies
41
Copy settings ....................................................................................................... 41
Stop copying.................................................................................................. 41
Changing copy quality ...................................................................................41
Enlarging or reducing the copied image ........................................................ 42
Making N in 1 copies or a poster (Page Layout) ........................................... 43
2 in 1 ID Copy................................................................................................ 46
Sorting copies using the ADF ........................................................................46
Adjusting Density........................................................................................... 47
Ink Save Mode...............................................................................................47
Thin Paper Copy............................................................................................ 48
Skew Adjustment........................................................................................... 48
Book Copy ..................................................................................................... 49
Watermark Copy............................................................................................ 49
Duplex (2-sided) copying ...............................................................................50
Setting your favorites..................................................................................... 53
8
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or
USB Flash memory drive
54
PhotoCapture Center™ operations ..................................................................... 54
Memory cards, USB Flash memory drive and folder structures .................... 54
Movie printing ................................................................................................ 55
Print Images......................................................................................................... 55
Print Index (Thumbnails) ...............................................................................55
Printing Photos .............................................................................................. 56
Enhance Photos ............................................................................................ 56
DPOF printing................................................................................................ 58
PhotoCapture Center™ print settings.................................................................. 59
Print Quality ................................................................................................... 59
Paper options ................................................................................................ 59
Adjusting Brightness, Contrast and Color...................................................... 60
Cropping ........................................................................................................61
Borderless printing......................................................................................... 62
Print Date....................................................................................................... 62
Setting your changes as the new default....................................................... 62
Restoring all settings to the factory settings .................................................. 62
Scan to a memory card or USB Flash memory drive .......................................... 63
Glass Scan Size ............................................................................................ 63
Auto Crop ......................................................................................................63
How to set a new default ...............................................................................64
How to reset to the factory settings ............................................................... 65
iv
9
Printing photos from a camera
66
Printing photos directly from a PictBridge camera ...............................................66
PictBridge requirements ................................................................................66
Setting your digital camera ............................................................................67
Printing Images..............................................................................................68
DPOF printing ................................................................................................68
Printing photos directly from a digital camera (without PictBridge)......................69
Printing Images..............................................................................................69
A
Routine maintenance
70
Cleaning and checking the machine ....................................................................70
Cleaning the outside of the machine .............................................................70
Cleaning the machine’s printer platen ...........................................................71
Cleaning the paper feed rollers .....................................................................72
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers .................................................................73
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers for paper tray #2 .....................................74
Checking the ink volume ...............................................................................74
Packing and shipping the machine ......................................................................75
v
B
Glossary
77
C
Index
81
1
General setup
Memory storage
Even if there is a power failure, you will not
lose the settings you have chosen using the
MENU button because they are stored
permanently. Also, you will not lose your
settings in the FAX, SCAN, COPY and
PHOTO CAPTURE mode key menus if you
have chosen Set New Default or
Favorite Settings. You may have to
reset the date and time.
Note
During a power failure the machine will
retain messages that are in the memory
for approximately 24 hours.
1
1
Volume Settings
Ring Volume
1
1
1
You can choose a range of ring volume
levels, from High to Off. The machine will
keep your new default setting until you
change it.
Setting the Ring Volume from the
menu
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
1
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.
Press a or b to display Volume.
Press Volume.
Press Ring.
Press Low, Med, High or Off.
Press Stop/Exit.
1
Chapter 1
Beeper Volume
When the beeper is on, the machine will beep
when you press a key, make a mistake, or
after you send or receive a fax.
You can choose a range of beeper volume
levels, from High to Off.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.
Press a or b to display Volume.
Press Volume.
Press Beeper.
Press Low, Med, High or Off.
Press Stop/Exit.
1
Speaker Volume
You can choose a range of speaker volume
levels, from High to Off.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.
Press a or b to display Volume.
Press Volume.
Press Speaker.
Press Low, Med, High or Off.
Press Stop/Exit.
You can also adjust the speaker volume by
pressing Hook.
a
b
c
d
e
2
Press MENU.
Press Hook on the control panel.
Press d or c on the Touchscreen to
display the Volume button.
Press Volume.
Press d or c on the Touchscreen.
Each button press changes the volume
to the next setting.
Press Hook on the control panel.
1
General setup
Automatic Daylight
Saving Time
You can set the machine to change
automatically for daylight saving time. It will
reset itself forward one hour in the Spring and
backward one hour in the Fall. Make sure you
have set the correct date and time in the
Date&Time setting.
The factory setting is Off, so you will have to
turn on Automatic Daylight Saving Time as
follows.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Sleep Mode
1
You can choose how long the machine must
be idle (from 1 to 60 minutes) before it goes
into Sleep Mode. The timer will restart if any
operation is carried out on the machine.
a
b
c
d
e
f
Press General Setup.
Press a or b to display
Auto Daylight.
Press Auto Daylight.
1
g
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press General Setup.
Press a or b to display Sleep Mode.
Press Sleep Mode.
Press 1 Min, 2 Mins, 3 Mins,
5 Mins, 10 Mins, 30 Mins or
60 Mins, which is the length of time the
machine is idle before entering sleep
mode.
Press Stop/Exit.
Press On (or Off).
Press Stop/Exit.
3
1
Chapter 1
LCD screen
Setting the backlight
brightness
1
1
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD
backlight. If you are having difficulty reading
the LCD, try changing the brightness setting.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
a
b
Press General Setup.
Press a or b to display LCD Settings.
Press LCD Settings.
Press Backlight.
Press Light, Med or Dark.
Press Stop/Exit.
1
You can set how long the LCD backlight stays
on after you go back to the Ready screen.
c
d
e
f
g
h
4
Press General Setup.
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
c
d
e
f
g
h
Press Initial Setup.
i
Press OK.
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
Press a or b to display Dial Prefix.
Press Dial Prefix.
Press On (or Off).
Press Dial Prefix.
Enter the prefix number (up to 5 digits)
by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Note
• If your telephone system requires a timed
break recall (hookflash), press ! to enter
the break.
Press a or b to display LCD Settings.
• You cannot use ! with any other numbers
or characters.
Press LCD Settings.
• (Canada only) If the pulse dialing mode is
on, # and l are not available to use.
Press Dim Timer.
Press 10 Secs, 20 Secs, 30 Secs or
Off.
Press Stop/Exit.
1
The Dial Prefix setting will automatically dial a
predefined number before every fax number
you dial. For example, if your telephone
system requires you to dial 9 before dialing an
outside number use this setting to
automatically dial 9 for every fax you send.
Setting up or changing the
prefix number
Press MENU.
Setting the Dim Timer for the
backlight
a
b
Dial Prefix
j
Press Stop/Exit.
1
General setup
Mode Timer
1
1
The machine has four temporary mode keys
on the control panel: FAX, SCAN, COPY and
PHOTO CAPTURE. You can change the
amount of time the machine takes after the
last Scan, Copy or PhotoCapture operation
before it returns to FAX mode. If you choose
Off, the machine stays in the mode you used
last.
a
b
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
c
d
e
f
Press General Setup.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
Press a or b to display Mode Timer.
Press Mode Timer.
Press 0 Sec, 30 Secs, 1 Min,
2 Mins, 5 Mins or Off.
5
2
Security features
Secure Function Lock
2.0
Secure Function Lock lets you restrict public
access to certain machine functions:
 Fax Tx (Fax Transmit)
 Fax Rx (Fax Receive)
 Copy
 Scan
Before you begin to use
Secure Function Lock 2.0
2
You can configure Secure Function Lock 2.0
settings using a Web browser. Before
configuration, following preparations are
needed.
a
b
 PCC
 PC Print
Access to restricted operations can be
enabled by creating a restricted user.
Restricted users must enter a user password
to use the machine.
Make a careful note of your password. If you
forget it, please call Brother Customer
Service.
Note
• Only administrators can set limitations
and make changes for each user.
• If Fax Tx is disabled, you cannot use any
functions in the Fax menu.
• Polling Receive is enabled only when both
Fax Tx and Fax Rx are enabled.
6
Type “http://machine’s IP
address/” into your browser’s address
bar (where “machine’s IP address”
is the machine’s IP address).
http://192.168.1.2/
 Page Limit
Before using the security features, you must
first enter an administrator password.
Start your Web browser.
 For example:
 Color Print
This feature also prevents users from
changing the default settings of the machine
by limiting access to the menu settings.
2
Note
You can find the machine's IP address in
the Network Configuration List. (See
Printing the Network Configuration List in
the Network User’s Guide.)
c
Enter a password in the Login box.
(This is a password to log into the
machine's Web page, not the
administrator password for Secure
Function Lock.) Click
.
2
Security features
c
Note
If you are using a Web browser to
configure the machine's setting for the first
time, set a password.
1
Click
Please configure the password.
2
Enter a password you want to use
(up to 32 characters).
3
Re-enter the password in
Confirm new password box.
4
2
2
You can configure these settings using a
Web browser. To set up the Web page, see
Before you begin to use Secure Function
Lock 2.0 on page 6. Then follow the
instructions below.
Setting the administrator password
The password you set in these steps is for the
administrator. This password is used to set
up users and to turn Secure Function Lock on
or off. (See Setting up restricted users
on page 8 and Turning Secure Function Lock
on/off on page 8.)
a
b
d
Re-enter the password in the
Retype Password box.
e
Click Submit.
Click Submit.
Setting and changing the
Administrator Password
Enter a four-digit number for the
password in the New Password box.
2
Changing the administrator password
a
b
c
Click Administrator.
d
Re-enter the new password in the
Retype Password box.
e
Click Submit.
2
Click Secure Function Lock.
Enter a four-digit number for the new
password in the New Password box.
Click Administrator.
Click Secure Function Lock.
7
Chapter 2
Setting up restricted users
You can set up users with restrictions and a
password. You can set up to 10 restricted
users.
You can configure these settings using a
Web browser.
To set up the Web page, see Before you
begin to use Secure Function Lock 2.0
on page 6. Then follow the instructions
below.
a
b
c
Click Administrator.
Click Secure Function Lock.
Enter an alphanumeric Group name or
User name (up to 15 characters) in the
ID Number/Name box and then enter a
four-digit password in the PIN box.
2
Turning Secure Function
Lock on/off
Note
Make a careful note of the administrator
password. If you enter the wrong
password, the LCD will show
Wrong Password. Enter the correct
password. If you forget it, please call
Brother Customer Service.
Turning Secure Function Lock on
a
b
c
d
e
f
d
Uncheck the functions that you want to
restrict in the Print box or the Others
box. If you want to configure the
maximum page count, check the On box
in Page Limit, and then enter the
number in the Max. box. Then click
Submit.
Note
• You cannot use the same password as
another user’s password.
• You can set up one Public user. Public
users do not need to enter a password.
For more information, see the Network
User's Guide.
8
2
Press MENU.
Press General Setup.
Press a or b to display
Function Lock.
Press Function Lock.
Press Lock OffiOn.
Enter your four-digit administrator
password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Turning Secure Function Lock off
a
b
c
2
Press
Publ ic
.
Press Lock OniOff.
Enter your four-digit administrator
password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
2
Security features
Switching users
2
This setting allows a restricted user to log on
the machine when Secure Function Lock is
turned on.
a
2
Hold down Shift as you press l.
Or, on the Touchscreen, press
or
xxxxx
(where xxxxx is the user’s name). Then
press Change User.
Publ ic
b
c
d
Press a or b to display your user name.
Press your user name.
Enter your four-digit user password by
pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Changing to the Public mode
a
Press
xxxxx
the user’s name).
b
Press Go to Public.
2
(where xxxxx is
Note
After a restricted user has finished using
the machine, it will return to the Public
setting within the same time as the Mode
Timer setting. (See Mode Timer
on page 5.)
9
3
Sending a fax
Additional sending
options
Sending faxes using multiple
settings
When you send a fax you can choose a
combination of settings, such as
Fax Resolution, Contrast,
Duplex Fax, Glass Scan Size,
Real Time TX, and Preview.
You can also choose: Call History,
Phone Book, Broadcasting,
Delayed Fax, Batch TX, Polled TX,
Polling RX, Overseas Mode,
Set New Default, and Factory Reset.
Some settings are only available when
sending black & white faxes.
a
b
c
d
Press
(FAX).
The LCD shows:
Press d or c to display a setting you
want to change. When the setting is
displayed, press it.
Press an option.
Repeat steps b to c to change more
settings.
3
Note
3
3
• Most settings are temporary and the
machine returns to its default settings after
you send a fax.
• You can save some of the settings you
use most often by setting them as the
default. These settings will stay until you
change them again. (See Setting your
changes as the new default on page 11.)
Stop faxing
3
To stop faxing, press Stop/Exit.
Contrast
3
If your document is very light or very dark, you
may want to change the contrast. For most
documents the factory setting Auto can be
used. It automatically chooses the suitable
contrast for your document.
Choose Light when sending a light
document. Choose Dark when sending a
dark document.
a
Press
b
c
d
Press d or c to display Contrast.
(FAX).
Press Contrast.
Press Auto, Light or Dark.
Note
Even if you choose Light or Dark, the
machine will send the fax using the Auto
setting in any of the following conditions:
• When you send a color fax.
• When you choose Photo as the Fax
Resolution.
10
Sending a fax
Changing fax resolution
The quality of a fax can be improved by
changing the fax resolution.
3
Setting your changes as the
new default
3
You can save the fax settings for
Fax Resolution, Contrast,
Glass Scan Size, Preview and
Real Time TX you use most often by
setting them as default. These settings will
stay until you change them again.
a
Press
b
Press d or c to display
Fax Resolution.
c
d
Press Fax Resolution.
a
Press
Press the resolution you want.
b
Press d or c to choose the setting you
want to change, and then press your
new option.
(FAX).
Note
You can choose four different resolution
settings for black & white faxes and two for
color faxes.
Black & White
Standard
Suitable for most typed
documents.
Fine
Good for small print and
transmits a little slower than
Standard resolution.
S.Fine
Good for small print or artwork
and transmits slower than Fine
resolution.
Photo
Use when the document has
varying shades of gray or is a
photograph. Photo has the
slowest transmission.
Color
(FAX).
Repeat this step for each setting you
want to change.
c
After changing the last setting, press
d or c to display Set New Default.
d
e
f
Press Set New Default.
Press Yes.
Press Stop/Exit.
Restoring fax settings to the
factory settings
3
You can restore all the fax settings you have
changed to the factory settings. These
settings will stay until you change them again.
Standard
Suitable for most typed
documents.
a
Press
Fine
Use when the document is a
photograph. The transmission
time is slower than Standard
resolution.
b
Press d or c to display
Factory Reset.
c
d
e
Press Factory Reset.
If you choose S.Fine or Photo and then
use the Color Start key to send a fax, the
machine will send the fax using the Fine
setting.
3
(FAX).
Press Yes.
Press Stop/Exit.
11
Chapter 3
Additional sending
operations
Sending a duplex (2-sided) fax
from the ADF
You can send 2-sided documents up to Legal
size from the ADF.
a
b
c
d
Press Duplex on the machine’s control
panel.
Load your document in the ADF.
Do one of the following:
Long edge
Portrait
Landscape
 If your document is flipped on the
Short edge, press
DuplexScan :ShortEdge.
Short edge
Portrait
Landscape
Enter the fax number.
Press Black Start or Color Start.
The machine will now scan and send your
document.
12
3
3
Manual transmission lets you hear the
dialing, ringing and fax-receiving tones while
sending a fax.
Note
3
To send a multiple page fax, use the ADF.
a
Press
b
c
Load your document.
d
Dial the fax number.
Press Fax.
 If your document is flipped on the
Long edge, press
DuplexScan :LongEdge.
e
f
Sending a fax manually
(FAX).
To listen for a dial tone, press Hook or
pick up the handset of the external
telephone.
Note
If your network supports the LDAP
protocol you can search for fax numbers
and E-mail addresses on your server.
(See LDAP operation in the Network
User’s Guide.)
e
When you hear the fax tone, press
Black Start or Color Start.
If you are using the scanner glass, press
Send on the Touchscreen to send the
fax.
If you pressed Color Start, go to
step f.
f
If you picked up the handset of an
external telephone, replace it.
Sending a fax
Sending a fax at the end of a
conversation
3
At the end of a conversation, you can send a
fax to the other party before you both hang
up.
a
Press
c
d
Load your document.
(FAX).
Before you begin the broadcast
Replace the handset of the external
phone.
You can dial a number and start scanning the
fax into memory—even when the machine is
sending from memory, receiving faxes or
printing PC data. The LCD shows the new job
number and available memory.
The number of pages you can scan into the
memory will vary depending on the data that
is printed on them.
Note
If the Out of Memory message appears
while scanning a document, press
Stop/Exit to cancel or Black Start to send
the scanned pages.
3
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers must be
stored in the machine's memory before they
can be used in a broadcast. (See Storing One
Touch Dial numbers and Storing Speed Dial
numbers in chapter 7 of the Basic User's
Guide.)
Press Black Start or Color Start.
Dual Access
(Black & White only)
3
After the broadcast is finished, a Broadcast
Report will be printed.
 If you are using the scanner glass,
press Send to send the fax.
e
3
Broadcasting is when the same fax message
is automatically sent to more than one fax
number. You can include Groups, One Touch
numbers, Speed Dial numbers, and up to 50
manually dialed numbers in the same
broadcast.
Ask the other party to wait for fax tones
(beeps) and then to press the Start or
Send key before hanging up.
b
Broadcasting
(Black & White only)
3
Group numbers must also be stored in the
machine's memory before they can be used
in a broadcast. Group numbers include many
stored One Touch Dial and Speed Dial
numbers for easier dialing. (See Setting up
groups for Broadcasting on page 37.)
How to broadcast a fax
a
Press
b
c
d
e
Load your document.
3
(FAX).
Press d or c to display Broadcasting.
Press Broadcasting.
You can add numbers to the broadcast
in the following ways:
 Press Add Number and enter a
number by pressing the buttons on
the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
13
Chapter 3
Note
If you downloaded Internet Fax:
If you want to broadcast using an E-mail
address, press
, enter the E-mail
address, and press OK. (See Entering
Text in appendix C of the Basic User's
Guide.)
 Press Phone Book.
Press
to search by
Alphabetical Order or
Numerical Order. Press the locations
where you want to send a fax.
Press OK.
Note
If you chose Numerical Order:
One Touch Dial locations begin with l.
Speed Dial locations begin with #.
f
g
After you have entered all the fax
numbers by repeating step e, press OK.
Note
• If you did not use up any of the numbers
for Groups, you can broadcast faxes to as
many as 266 different numbers.
• The machine’s available memory will vary
depending on the types of jobs in the
memory and the number of locations used
for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the
maximum number available, you will not
be able to use dual access and delayed
fax.
• If the Out of Memory message
appears, press Stop/Exit to stop the job.
If more than one page has been scanned,
press Black Start to send the portion that
is in the machine’s memory.
Canceling a Broadcast in progress
a
b
 The machine starts scanning and
sending the document.
 To exit without canceling, press
Stop/Exit.
c
 To send a single page, press No (or
press Black Start again).
Press Black Start.
The machine starts scanning the
page. (Repeat this step for each
additional page.)
14
When the LCD asks if you want to
cancel the entire broadcast, do one of
the following:
 Press Yes to confirm.
 To exit without canceling, press No
or Stop/Exit.
The machine starts sending the
document.
 To send more than one page, press
Yes and place the next page on the
scanner glass.
Do one of the following:
 To cancel the current job, press the
button that displays the number
being dialed. Go to step d.
Faxing from the ADF
When the LCD asks you Next Page?,
do one of the following:
Press Stop/Exit.
 To cancel the entire broadcast, press
Entire Broadcast. Go to step c.
Press Black Start.
Faxing from the scanner glass
3
d
Do one of the following:
 To cancel the current job, press Yes.
 To exit without canceling, press No
or Stop/Exit.
Sending a fax
Real Time Transmission
3
When you are sending a fax, the machine will
scan the document into the memory before
sending it. Then, as soon as the telephone
line is free, the machine will start dialing and
sending.
Sometimes, you may want to send an
important document immediately, without
waiting for memory transmission. You can do
this by turning on Real Time TX.
a
Press
b
c
d
e
Load your document.
(FAX).
Press d or c to display Real Time TX.
Press Real Time TX.
Press On.
Note
• If you are sending a color fax or the
memory is full and you are sending a black
& white fax from the ADF, the machine will
send the document in real time (even if
Real Time TX is set to Off). Faxes
from the scanner glass cannot be sent
until you clear some of the memory.
• In Real Time Transmission, the automatic
redial feature does not work when you are
using the scanner glass.
Overseas Mode
3
If you are having difficulty sending a fax
overseas due to possible interference on the
telephone line, we recommend that you turn
on Overseas Mode. After you send a fax
using this feature, the feature will turn itself
off.
a
Press
b
c
Load your document.
d
e
3
(FAX).
Press d or c to display
Overseas Mode.
Press Overseas Mode.
Press On (or Off).
Delayed Faxing
(Black & White only)
3
You can store up to 50 faxes in the memory
to be sent within 24 hours. These faxes will
be sent at the time of day you enter in step f.
a
Press
b
c
d
e
f
Load your document.
(FAX).
Press d or c to display Delayed Fax.
Press Delayed Fax.
Press On.
Enter the time you want the fax to be
sent (in 24-hour format) by pressing the
buttons on the Touchscreen.
(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
Press OK.
Note
• When you set 12h Clock in the
Date&Time setting, enter the time in
12-hour format.
• The number of pages you can scan into
the memory depends on the amount of
data that is printed on each page.
15
Chapter 3
Delayed Batch Transmission
(Black & White only)
Before sending the delayed faxes, your
machine will help you economize by sorting
all the faxes in the memory by destination and
scheduled time. All delayed faxes that are
scheduled to be sent at the same time to the
same fax number will be sent as one fax to
save transmission time.
a
Press
b
c
d
e
Press d or c to display Batch TX.
(FAX).
Press Batch TX.
Press On.
Press Stop/Exit.
3
Checking and canceling
waiting jobs
3
You can check which jobs are still waiting in
the memory to be sent and cancel a job.
(If there are no jobs, the LCD shows
No Jobs Waiting.)
a
b
c
d
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Remaining Jobs.
e
Press Remaining Jobs.
Any waiting jobs appear on the LCD.
f
Press a or b to scroll through the jobs
and press the job you want to cancel.
Press OK.
g
Do one of the following:
 To cancel, press Yes.
If you want to cancel another job go
to step f.
 To exit without canceling, press No.
h
16
When you are finished, press Stop/Exit.
Sending a fax
Polling overview
h
3
Polling lets you set up your machine so other
people can receive faxes from you, but they
pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody
else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it,
so you pay for the call. The polling feature
needs to be set up on both machines for this
to work. Not all fax machines support polling.
Polled Transmit
(Black & White only)
3
Polled transmit lets you set up your machine
to wait with a document so another fax
machine can call and retrieve it.
If you are using the scanner glass, the
LCD will prompt you to choose one of
the following options:
 Press Yes to scan another page.
Go to step i.
 Press No or Black Start to send the
document.
i
Place the next page on the scanner
glass and press Black Start. Repeat
steps h and i for each additional
page.
Your machine will automatically send
the fax.
The document will be stored and can be
retrieved by any other fax machine until you
delete it from the memory. (See Checking
and canceling waiting jobs on page 16.)
Setup for polled transmit
a
Press
b
c
d
e
f
Load your document.
g
3
(FAX).
Press d or c to display Polled TX.
Press Polled TX.
Press On (or Off).
Press d or c to display any settings you
want to change, and press it. Then
choose your option. After each setting is
accepted, you can continue to change
more settings.
Press Black Start.
17
3
4
Receiving a fax
Memory Receive
(Black & White only)
Fax Forwarding
4
You can only use one Memory Receive
operation at a time:
 Fax Forwarding
 Fax Storage
 PC-Fax Receive
 Off
You can change your selection at any time. If
received faxes are still in the machine’s
memory when you change the Memory
Receive operation, a question will appear on
the LCD. (See Changing Memory Receive
operations on page 22.)
As soon as the paper tray becomes empty
during fax reception, the LCD shows
No Paper Fed. Put some paper in the
paper tray. (See Loading paper and other
print media in chapter 2 of the Basic User’s
Guide.)
If you don't put paper in the paper tray, the
machine will carry on receiving the fax, with
the remaining pages being stored in memory,
if enough memory is available.
Further incoming faxes will also be stored in
memory until the memory is full. When the
memory is full the machine will stop
automatically answering calls. To print the
faxes, put fresh paper in the tray.
18
When you choose Fax Forward, your
machine stores the received fax in the
memory. The machine will then dial the fax
number you have programmed and forward
the fax message.
a
b
c
d
 Paging
Receiving faxes into memory
when paper tray is empty
4
e
f
4
g
h
i
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.
Press a or b to display
Memory Receive.
Press Memory Receive.
Press Fax Forward.
Do one of the following:
 To forward faxes to another
machine, enter the forwarding
number (up to 20 digits) by pressing
the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
 To forward faxes to an E-mail
address, press
, enter the
E-mail address and press OK.
(See Entering Text in appendix C of
the Basic User’s Guide.)
4
Receiving a fax
j
Press Backup Print:On or
Backup Print:Off.
i
Enter your cell phone or pager number
followed by # # (up to 20 digits).
Press OK.
Do not include the area code if it is the
same as that of your machine.
For example, press:
1 8 0 0 5 5 5 1 2 3 4 # #.
j
Do one of the following:
IMPORTANT
• If you choose Backup Print:On, the
machine will also print the fax at your
machine so you will have a copy. This is a
safety feature in case there is a power
failure before the fax is forwarded or a
problem at the receiving machine.
 If you are programming your cell
phone number and do not need to
enter a PIN, press OK.
• When you receive a color fax, your
machine prints the color fax at your
machine but does not send the fax to the
fax forwarding number you programmed.
k
 If your pager needs a PIN, enter the
PIN, press #, press Pause, and then
enter your fax number followed by
# #.
Press Stop/Exit.
Paging
Press OK.
For example, press:
1 2 3 4 5 # Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5 5 6 7 8
9##
4
When you choose Paging, your machine
dials the cell phone or pager number you
have programmed. This activates your cell
phone or pager so you will know that you
have a fax message in the memory.
If you have set Paging, a backup copy of the
received fax will automatically be printed at
the machine.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
4
 If you do not need a PIN, press:
Pause, and then enter your fax
number followed by # #. Press OK.
For example, press:
Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5 5 6 7 8 9 # #
k
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
You cannot change a paging number or
PIN remotely.
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.
Press a or b to display
Memory Receive.
Press Memory Receive.
Press Paging.
19
Chapter 4
Fax Storage
If you choose Fax Storage, your machine
stores the received fax in the memory. You
will be able to retrieve fax messages from
another location using the remote retrieval
commands.
If you have set Fax Storage, a backup copy
will automatically be printed at the machine.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.
Press a or b to display
Memory Receive.
Press Memory Receive.
Press Fax Storage.
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
Color faxes cannot be stored in the
memory. When you receive a color fax
your machine prints the color fax at your
machine.
20
4
Printing a fax from the
memory
If you have chosen Paging or Fax Storage,
you can still print a fax from the memory when
you are at your machine. (See Memory
Receive (Black & White only) on page 18.)
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display Print Fax.
Press Print Fax.
Press Black Start.
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
When you print a fax from the memory, the
fax data will be erased.
4
Receiving a fax
PC-Fax Receive
(Windows® only)
4
If you turn on the PC-Fax Receive feature
your machine will store received faxes in
memory and send them to your PC
automatically. You can then use your PC to
view and store these faxes.
Even if you have turned off your PC (at night
or on the weekend, for example), your
machine will receive and store your faxes in
its memory. The number of received faxes
that are stored in the memory will appear on
the LCD.
When you start your PC and the PC-FAX
Receiving software runs, your machine
transfers your faxes to your PC automatically.
To transfer the received faxes to your PC you
must have the PC-FAX Receiving software
running on your PC. (For details, see PC-FAX
receiving in the Software User’s Guide.)
If you choose Backup Print:On the
machine will also print the fax.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
k
l
Press OK.
m
Press Stop/Exit.
Press Backup Print:On or
Backup Print:Off.
Note
• PC-Fax Receive is not supported in the
Mac OS.
• Before you can set up PC-Fax Receive
you must install the MFL-Pro Suite
software on your PC. Make sure your PC
is connected and turned on. (For details
see PC-FAX receiving in the Software
User’s Guide.)
• If you get an error message and the
machine cannot print the faxes in memory,
you can use this setting to transfer your
faxes to your PC. (For details, see
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal
report in appendix B of the Basic User’s
Guide.)
• When you receive a color fax, your
machine prints the color fax at your
machine but does not send the fax to your
PC.
Press Fax.
Changing the destination PC
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
a
b
c
d
Press Setup Receive.
Press a or b to display
Memory Receive.
Press Memory Receive.
Press PC Fax Receive.
The LCD shows the message
Run PC-Fax on your computer.
Press OK.
Press <USB> or the PC you want to
receive faxes.
4
e
f
g
h
4
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.
Press a or b to display
Memory Receive.
Press Memory Receive.
Press PC Fax Receive.
21
Chapter 4
i
The LCD shows the message
Run PC-Fax on your computer.
Press OK.
Changing Memory Receive
operations
j
Press <USB>, or the PC you want to
receive faxes.
k
l
Press OK.
If received faxes remain in your machine’s
memory when you change the Memory
Receive Operations, the LCD will ask you
one of the following questions:
m
e
f
g
h
i
 Print All Fax?
Press Stop/Exit.
Turning off Memory Receive
operations
a
b
c
d
 Erase All Fax?
Press Backup Print:On or
Backup Print:Off.
4
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.
Press a or b to display
Memory Receive.
Press Memory Receive.
Press Off.
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
The LCD will give you more options if
there are received faxes still in the
machine’s memory. (See Changing
Memory Receive operations on page 22.)
22
• If you press Yes, faxes in the memory
will be erased or printed before the
setting changes. If a backup copy has
already been printed it will not be
printed again.
• If you press No, faxes in the memory
will not be erased or printed and the
setting will be unchanged.
If received faxes are left in the machine's
memory when you change to
PC Fax Receive from another option
[Fax Forward, Paging or Fax Storage],
press a or b to choose the PC.
The LCD will ask you the following question:
 Send Fax to PC?
• If you press Yes, faxes in the memory
will be sent to your PC before the
setting changes. You will be asked if
you want to turn on Backup Print. (For
details, see PC-Fax Receive
(Windows® only) on page 21.)
• If you press No, faxes in the memory
will not be erased or transferred to your
PC and the setting will be unchanged.
4
Receiving a fax
Remote Retrieval
You can change your code at any time by
entering a new one. If you want to make
your code inactive, press Clear in
step f to restore the inactive setting (---l)
and press OK.
You can call your machine from any
touch-tone telephone or fax machine and
then use the remote access code and remote
commands to retrieve fax messages.
Setting a Remote Access
Code
The Remote Access Code lets you access
the remote retrieval features when you are
away from your machine. Before you can use
the remote access and retrieval features, you
have to set up your own code. The factory
default code is the inactive code (--- ).
a
b
c
d
e
f
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Note
4
4
Using your Remote Access
Code
a
Dial your fax number from a touch-tone
telephone or another fax machine.
b
When your machine answers, enter
your remote access code (3 digits
followed by ) at once.
c
The machine signals if it has received
messages:
 1 long beep — Fax messages
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Remote Access.
 No beeps — No messages
d
When the machine gives two short
beeps, enter a command.
The machine will hang up if you wait
longer than 30 seconds to enter a
command.
The machine will beep three times if you
enter an invalid command.
e
Press 9 0 to stop Remote Access when
you have finished.
f
Hang up.
Press Remote Access.
Enter a three-digit code using numbers
0-9, l, or # by pressing the buttons on
the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
(The preset ‘l’ cannot be changed.)
Note
Do not use the same code as your Fax
Receive Code (l 5 1) or Telephone
Answer Code (# 5 1). (See Using external
and extension telephones in chapter 6 of
the Basic User’s Guide.)
g
Press Stop/Exit.
4
Note
If your machine is set to Manual mode
and you want to use the remote retrieval
features, wait for about 100 seconds after
it starts ringing, and then enter the remote
access code within 30 seconds.
23
4
Chapter 4
Remote Fax commands
4
Follow the commands below to access features when you are away from the machine. When you
call the machine and enter your remote access code (3 digits followed by ), the system will give
two short beeps and you must enter a remote command.
Remote commands
95
Change the Fax Forwarding,
Paging or Fax Storage settings
1 OFF
You can choose Off after you have retrieved or erased all
your messages.
2 Fax Forwarding
One long beep means the change is accepted. If you hear
three short beeps, you cannot make a change because
something has not been set up (for example, a Fax
Forwarding or Paging number has not been registered).
You can register your Fax Forwarding number by entering
4. (See Changing your Fax Forwarding number
on page 25.) Once you have registered the number, Fax
Forwarding will work.
3 Paging
4 Fax Forwarding number
6 Fax Storage
96
97
Retrieve a fax
2 Retrieve all faxes
Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive stored
fax messages. (See Retrieving fax messages on page 25.)
3 Erase faxes from the memory
If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased
from the memory.
Check the receiving status
1 Fax
98
Operation details
You can check whether your machine has received any
faxes. If yes, you will hear one long beep. If no, you will hear
three short beeps.
Change the Receive Mode
1 External TAD
If you hear one long beep, your change has been accepted.
2 Fax/Tel
3 Fax Only
90
24
Exit
Pressing 9 0 allows you to exit remote retrieval. Wait for the
long beep, then replace the handset.
Receiving a fax
Retrieving fax messages
You can call your machine from any
touch-tone telephone and have your fax
messages sent to another machine. Before
you use this feature, you have to turn on Fax
Storage.
a
b
Dial your fax number.
c
When you hear two short beeps,
press 9 6 2.
d
Wait for a long beep, and then use the
dial pad to enter the number of the
remote fax machine where you want
your fax messages sent, followed by # #
(up to 20 digits).
When your machine answers, enter
your remote access code (3 digits
followed by ) at once. If you hear one
long beep, you have messages.
Note
You cannot use l and # as dial numbers.
However, press # if you want to create a
pause.
e
Hang up after you hear your machine
beep. Your machine will call the other
fax machine, which will then print your
fax messages.
4
Changing your Fax
Forwarding number
4
You can change the default setting of your fax
forwarding number from another touch-tone
telephone or fax machine.
a
b
Dial your fax number.
When your machine answers, enter
your remote access code (3 digits
followed by ) at once. If you hear one
long beep, you have messages.
c
When you hear two short beeps,
press 9 5 4.
d
Wait for the long beep, enter the new
number (up to 20 digits) of the remote
fax machine you want your fax
messages forwarded to using the dial
pad, then enter # #.
Note
You cannot use l and # as dial numbers.
However, press # if you want to create a
pause.
e
Press 9 0 to stop Remote Access when
you have finished.
f
Hang up after you hear your machine
beep.
25
4
Chapter 4
Additional receiving
operations
Printing a reduced incoming
fax
If you choose On, the machine automatically
reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on
one page of Letter, Legal, Ledger, A4 or A3
size paper. The machine calculates the
reduction ratio by using the page size of the
fax and your Paper Size setting. (See Paper
Size and Type in chapter 2 of the Basic
User’s Guide.)
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
26
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
Press Setup Receive.
Press a or b to display
Auto Reduction.
Press Auto Reduction.
Press On (or Off).
Press Stop/Exit.
Receiving a fax at the end of a
conversation
4
At the end of a conversation, you can ask the
other party to fax you information before you
both hang up.
4
a
Ask the other party to place the
document in their machine and to press
the Start or Send key.
b
When you hear the other machine's
CNG tones (slowly repeating beeps),
press Black Start or Color Start.
c
d
Press Receive to receive the fax.
Replace the handset of the external
telephone.
4
Receiving a fax
Polling overview
4
Polling lets you set up your machine so other
people can receive faxes from you, but they
pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody
else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it,
so you pay for the call. The polling feature
needs to be set up on both machines for this
to work. Not all fax machines support polling.
Polling receive
a
Press
b
c
d
e
Press d or c to display Polling RX.
f
Do one of the following:
 Press Phone Book. Press
to choose Alphabetical Order or
Numerical Order. Press a or b to
select a number.
Press OK.
4
Note
If you chose Numerical Order:
4
(FAX).
Press Polling RX.
Press On (or Off).
One Touch Dial locations begin with l.
Speed Dial locations begin with #.
h
After you have entered all the fax
numbers by repeating step g, press OK.
i
Press Black Start.
The machine polls each number or
Group number in turn for a document.
Press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialing
to cancel the polling process.
Enter the fax number you are polling
using One Touch, Speed Dial or the dial
pad on the control panel.
To cancel all sequential polling receive jobs,
see Checking and canceling waiting jobs
on page 16.
Press Black Start or Color Start.
The LCD shows Dialing.
Sequential polling
(Black & White only)
Press Broadcasting.
 Press Add Number and enter a
number by pressing the buttons on
the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
4
Polling receive lets you call another fax
machine to receive a fax.
Setup to receive polling
f
g
4
Sequential polling lets you request
documents from several fax machines in one
operation. Afterwards, a Sequential Polling
Report will be printed.
a
Press
b
c
d
e
Press d or c to display Polling RX.
(FAX).
Press Polling RX.
Press On (or Off).
Press d or c to display Broadcasting.
27
Chapter 4
Canceling a Sequential Polling Job
a
b
4
Press Stop/Exit.
Do one of the following:
 To cancel the entire sequential
polling job, press
Entire Seq. Poll. Go to step c.
 To cancel the current job, press the
button that displays the number
being dialed. Go to step d.
 To exit without canceling, press
Stop/Exit.
c
When the LCD asks if you want to
cancel the entire sequential polling job,
do one of the following:
 Press Yes to confirm.
 To exit without canceling, press No
or Stop/Exit.
d
Do one of the following:
 To cancel the current job, press Yes.
 To exit without canceling, press No
or Stop/Exit.
28
5
Dialing and storing numbers
Voice operations
5
Voice calls can be made either with an
external telephone by dialing manually or by
using Quick Dial numbers.
Tone or Pulse (Canada only)
5
b
Pick up the handset of an external
telephone or press Hook.
5
The Caller ID feature lets you use the Caller
ID subscriber service offered by many local
telephone companies. Call your telephone
company for details. This service shows the
telephone number, or name if it is available,
of your caller as the line rings.
You can view the list or choose one of these
numbers to fax to, add to One Touch or
Speed Dial, or delete from the history. (See
Caller ID history on page 32.)
Press # on the machine’s control panel.
Any digits dialed after this will send tone
signals.
 You can see the first 20 characters of the
number (or name).
When you hang up, the machine will return to
the Pulse dialing service.
Fax/Tel mode
Caller ID
After a few rings, the LCD shows the
telephone number of your caller (and name, if
available). Once you answer a call, the Caller
ID information disappears from the LCD, but
the call information stays stored in the Caller
ID memory.
If you have a Pulse dialing service, but need
to send tone signals (for example, for
telephone banking), follow the instructions
below:
a
5
5
 The # Unavailable message means
the call originated outside your Caller ID
service area.
When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will
use the F/T Ring (pseudo/double-ringing) to
alert you to pick up a voice call.
 The Private Call message means the
caller has intentionally blocked
transmission of Caller ID information.
If you are at the extension telephone, you'll
need to lift the handset during the F/T Ring
and then press # 5 1 between the
pseudo/double-rings. If no one is on the line,
or if someone wants to send you a fax, send
the call back to the machine by pressing
l 5 1.
You can print a list of the Caller ID information
received by your machine. (See How to print
a report on page 40.)
If you are at the machine, lift the external
telephone’s handset, and then press Hook to
answer.
• The Caller ID service varies with different
carriers. Call your local telephone
company to find out about the kind of
service available in your area.
Note
• This feature may not be available in
certain areas of the USA and Canada.
29
5
Chapter 5
Setting up your area code (USA only)
When returning calls from the Caller ID
history your machine will automatically dial
“1” plus the area code for all calls. If your local
dialing plan requires that the “1” not be used
for calls within your area code, enter your
area code in this setting. With the area code
setting, calls returned from the Caller ID
history to numbers within your area code will
be dialed using 10 digits (area code + 7-digit
number). If your dialing plan does not follow
the standard 1 + area code + 7-digit number
dialing system for calling outside your area
code, you may experience problems
returning calls automatically from the Caller
ID history. If this is not the procedure followed
by your dialing plan, you will not be able to
return calls automatically.
a
b
c
d
Special line considerations
Roll-over telephone lines
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Two-line telephone system
Press Fax.
A two-line telephone system is nothing more
than two separate telephone numbers on the
same wall outlet. The two telephone numbers
can be on separate jacks (RJ11) or mixed into
one jack (RJ14). Your machine must be
plugged into an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14
jacks may be equal in size and appearance
and both may contain four wires (black, red,
green, yellow). To test the type of jack, plug in
a two-line telephone and see if it can access
both lines. If it can, you must separate the line
for your machine.
Press a or b to display
Miscellaneous.
Press Miscellaneous.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
Press a or b to display Area Code.
Press Area Code.
Enter your Area Code (3-digit number),
and press OK.
5
5
A roll-over telephone system is a group of two
or more separate telephone lines that pass
incoming calls to each other if they are busy.
The calls are usually passed down or “rolled
over” to the next available telephone line in a
preset order.
Your machine can work in a roll-over system
as long as it is the last number in the
sequence so the call cannot roll away. Do not
put the machine on any of the other numbers;
when the other lines are busy and a second
fax call is received, the fax call will be sent to
a line that does not have a fax machine. Your
machine will work best on a dedicated
line.
e
f
g
h
30
5
5
Dialing and storing numbers
Converting telephone wall outlets
5
There are three ways to convert to an RJ11
jack. The first two ways may require help from
the telephone company. You can change the
wall outlets from one RJ14 jack to two RJ11
jacks. Or, you can have an RJ11 wall outlet
installed and slave or jump one of the
telephone numbers to it.
The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex
adapter. You can plug a triplex adapter into
an RJ14 outlet. It separates the wires into two
separate RJ11 jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a
third RJ14 jack (Lines 1 and 2). If your
machine is on Line 1, plug the machine into
L1 of the triplex adapter. If your machine is on
Line 2, plug it into L2 of the triplex adapter.
Triplex Adapter
b
Plug one end of the telephone line cord
for your machine into the L2 jack of the
triplex adapter. Plug the other end into
the LINE jack on the back of the
machine.
c
Plug one end of the first telephone line
cord for your TAD into the L1 jack of the
triplex adapter. Plug the other end into
the L1 or L1/L2 jack of the two-line TAD.
d
Plug one end of the second telephone
line cord for your TAD into the L2 jack of
the two-line TAD. Plug the other end into
the EXT. jack on the left side of the
machine.
1
2
5
RJ14
3
4
RJ11
RJ14
Installing machine, external two-line
TAD and two-line telephone
When you are installing an external two-line
telephone answering device (TAD) and a
two-line telephone, your machine must be
isolated on one line at both the wall jack and
at the TAD. The most common connection is
to put the machine on Line 2, which is
explained in the following steps. The back of
the two-line TAD must have two telephone
jacks: one labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other
labeled L2. You will need at least three
telephone line cords: the one that came with
your machine and two for your external twoline TAD. You will need a fourth line cord if
you add a two-line telephone.
a
5
1
Triplex Adapter
2
Two Line Telephone
3
External Two Line TAD
4
Machine
Your additional two-line telephones on other
wall outlets do not require adapters. There
are two ways to add a two-line telephone to
the machine's wall outlet. You can plug the
telephone line cord from the two-line
telephone into the L1+L2 jack of the triplex
adapter. Or, you can plug the two-line
telephone into the TEL jack of the two-line
TAD.
Put the two-line TAD and the two-line
telephone next to your machine.
31
5
Chapter 5
Additional dialing
operations
Outgoing Call
The last 30 numbers you sent a fax to will be
stored in the outgoing call history. You can
choose one of these numbers to fax to, add to
One Touch or Speed Dial, or delete from the
history.
a
Press Redial/Pause.
You can also press
(Call History).
b
c
d
Press the Outgoing Call tab.
Press the number you want.
Do one of the following:
 To send a fax, press Send a fax.
 If you want to store the number,
press More and then press
Add to Speed Dial or
Add to One Touch Dial.
(See Storing One Touch numbers
from Outgoing Calls on page 34 or
Storing Speed Dial numbers from
Outgoing Calls on page 35.)
Caller ID history
5
This feature requires the Caller ID subscriber
service offered by many local telephone
companies. (See Caller ID on page 29.)
5
The number, or name if available, from the
last 30 fax and telephone calls you received
will be stored in the Caller ID history. You can
view the list or choose one of these numbers
to fax to, add to One Touch or Speed Dial, or
delete from the history. When the thirty-first
call comes into the machine, it replaces
information about the first call.
Note
If you are not a Caller ID subscriber, Caller
ID history only allows you to view and
delete the dates of calls.
a
Press
b
c
Press Caller ID hist.
d
Press the number or the name you want
to call.
e
Do one of the following:
Press a or b to display the number or the
name you want to call.
 To send a fax, press Send a fax.
 If you want to delete the number from
the Outgoing Call history list, press
More and then press Delete.
 If you want to store the number,
press More and then press
Add to Speed Dial or
Add to One Touch Dial.
Press Yes to confirm.
e
(Call History).
(See Storing One Touch numbers
from the Caller ID history on page 34
and Storing Speed Dial numbers
from the Caller ID history
on page 36.)
Press Stop/Exit.
 If you want to delete the number from
the Caller ID history list, press More
and then press Delete.
Press Yes to confirm.
f
32
Press Stop/Exit.
5
Dialing and storing numbers
f
g
Note
• (USA only) If you redial from the Caller ID
history outside your area code, you must
set up your AREA CODE in advance.
(See Setting up your area code (USA
only) on page 30.)
Press Black Start or Color Start.
You will dial ‘555-7000’.
To temporarily change a number, you can
substitute part of the number with manual
dialing using the dial pad. For example, to
change the number to 555-7001 you could
• You can print the Caller ID List.
(See How to print a report on page 40.)
Dialing access codes and
credit card numbers
Press Send a fax.
press
(Phone Book), press #03,
press Send a fax and then press 7001
using the dial pad.
5
Sometimes, you may want to choose from
several long distance carriers when you send
a fax. Rates may vary depending on the time
and destination. To take advantage of low
rates, you can store the access codes of longdistance carriers and credit card numbers as
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers. You
can store these long dialing sequences by
dividing them and setting them up as
separate One Touch and Speed Dial
numbers in any combination. You can even
include manual dialing using the dial pad.
(See Storing One Touch Dial numbers or
Storing Speed Dial numbers in chapter 7 of
the Basic User’s Guide.)
Note
If you must wait for another dial tone or
signal at any point in the dialing sequence,
create a pause in the number by pressing
Redial/Pause. Each key press adds a
3.5-second delay.
For example, you might have stored ‘555’ on
Speed Dial: 03 and ‘7000’ on One Touch: 02.
You can use them both to dial ‘555-7000’ if
you press the following buttons on the
Touchscreen:
a
Press
b
Press #03.
(Phone Book).
Note
One Touch Dial locations begin with l.
Speed Dial locations begin with #.
c
d
e
Press Send a fax.
Press Phone Book.
Press l02.
33
5
Chapter 5
Additional ways to
store numbers
Storing One Touch numbers
from Outgoing Calls
You can store One Touch numbers from the
Outgoing Call history.
a
Press Redial/Pause.
You can also choose by pressing
(Call History).
b
c
d
e
f
Press Outgoing Call tab.
Press the number you want to store.
Press More.
Press Add to One Touch Dial.
To choose where the number will be
stored, do one of the following:
 To accept the displayed next
available One Touch location, press
OK.
 To enter a different One Touch
location, press a number by pressing
the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Note
If the One Touch location you choose is
already taken, the OK button on the LCD
will not work. Choose a different location.
g
Do one of the following:
 Enter the name by pressing the
buttons on the Touchscreen (up to
16 characters).
Press OK.
(To help you enter letters, see
Entering Text in appendix C of the
Basic User’s Guide.)
 To store the number without a name,
press OK.
34
5
h
Press OK to accept the displayed
telephone or fax number.
i
When the LCD shows your settings,
press OK to confirm.
j
Press Stop/Exit.
5
Storing One Touch numbers
from the Caller ID history
If you have the Caller ID subscriber service
from your telephone company, you can also
store One Touch numbers from incoming
calls in the Caller ID History. (See Caller ID
on page 29.)
a
Press
b
c
Press the Caller ID hist. tab.
d
e
f
g
(Call History).
Press a or b to display the number you
want to store.
Press the number you want to store.
Press More.
Press Add to One Touch Dial.
To choose where the number will be
stored, do one of the following:
 To accept the displayed next
available One Touch location, press
OK.
 To enter a different One Touch
location, press a number by pressing
the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Note
If the One Touch location you choose is
already taken, the OK button on the LCD
will not work. Choose a different location.
5
Dialing and storing numbers
h
f
Do one of the following:
 If you want to store the displayed
name, press OK.
 Enter the name (up to 16 characters)
by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
 Enter the name (up to 16 characters)
by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
(To help you enter letters, see
Entering Text in appendix C of the
Basic User’s Guide.)
Press OK.
(To help you enter letters, see
Entering Text in appendix C of the
Basic User’s Guide.)
 To store the number without a name,
press OK.
 To store the number without a name,
press OK.
i
j
k
Press OK to confirm the fax or telephone
number.
g
Press OK to confirm the fax or telephone
number you want to store.
h
Do one of the following:
 Enter the second fax or telephone
number (up to 20 digits) by pressing
the buttons on the Touchscreen.
When the LCD shows your settings,
press OK to confirm.
Press OK.
Press Stop/Exit.
Storing Speed Dial numbers
from Outgoing Calls
 If you do not want to store a second
number, press OK.
i
5
b
c
d
e
 To enter a different Speed Dial
location, press a 2-digit number by
pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press Redial/Pause.
You can also choose the number by
pressing
(Call History).
Press OK.
Press the Outgoing Call tab.
Press the name or number you want to
store.
Press More.
Press Add to Speed Dial.
To choose where the number will be
stored, do one of the following:
 To accept the displayed next
available Speed Dial location, press
OK.
You can also store Speed Dial numbers from
the Outgoing Call history.
a
Do one of the following:
Note
• Speed Dial locations begin with # (for
example, # 0 2).
• If the 2-digit Speed Dial location you
choose is already taken, the OK button on
the LCD will not work. Choose a different
location.
j
When the LCD shows your settings,
press OK to confirm.
k
Press Stop/Exit.
35
5
Chapter 5
Storing Speed Dial numbers
from the Caller ID history
j
5
 To accept the displayed next
available Speed Dial location, press
OK.
If you have the Caller ID subscriber service
from your telephone company, you can also
store Speed Dial numbers from incoming
calls in the Caller ID History. (See Caller ID
on page 29.)
a
Press
b
c
Press the Caller ID hist. tab.
d
e
f
g
Press the number you want to store.
Press More.
Press Add to Speed Dial.
Do one of the following:
 If you want to store the displayed
name, press OK.
 Enter the name (up to 16 characters)
by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
(To help you enter letters, see
Entering Text in appendix C of the
Basic User’s Guide.)
 To store the number without a name,
press OK.
h
Press OK to confirm the fax or telephone
number you want to store.
i
Do one of the following:
 Enter a second fax or telephone
number (up to 20 digits) by pressing
the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
 If you do not want to store a second
number, press OK.
36
 To enter a different Speed Dial
location, press a 2-digit number by
pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
(Call History).
Press a or b to display the number you
want to store.
To choose where the number will be
stored, do one of the following:
Press OK.
Note
• Speed Dial locations begin with # (for
example, # 0 2).
• If the 2-digit Speed Dial location you
choose is already taken, the OK button on
the LCD will not work. Choose a different
location.
k
When the LCD shows your settings,
press OK to confirm.
l
Press Stop/Exit.
Dialing and storing numbers
Setting up groups for
Broadcasting
Groups, which can be stored on a One Touch
key or Speed Dial location, allow you to send
the same fax message to many fax numbers
by pressing only a One Touch key or a Speed
Dial location by pressing
(Phone Book), the two-digit location,
Send a fax and Black Start.
First, you'll need to store each fax number in
a One Touch key or Speed Dial location.
Then you can include them as numbers in the
Group. Each Group uses up a One Touch key
or Speed Dial location. You can have up to
six Groups, or you can assign up to
215 numbers to a large Group.
(See Broadcasting (Black & White only)
on page 13 and Storing One Touch Dial
numbers and Storing Speed Dial numbers in
chapter 7 of the Basic User’s Guide.)
a
Press
b
c
d
Press More.
(Phone Book).
h
5
Add One Touch or Speed Dial numbers
to the Group by pressing them to display
a red checkmark. Press OK.
If you want to list the numbers in
alphabetical order, press
.
Note
One Touch Dial locations begin with l.
Speed Dial locations begin with #.
i
When the LCD shows the Group Name
and numbers, press OK to confirm.
j
Do one of the following:
5
 To store another Group for
broadcasting, repeat steps b to i.
 To finish storing Groups for
broadcasting, press Stop/Exit.
Note
You can print a list of all the One Touch
and Speed Dial numbers. Group numbers
will be marked in the GROUP column.
(See Reports on page 40.)
Press Setup Groups.
Press Set Speed Dial or
Set One Touch Dial.
If you choose Set Speed Dial go to
step f.
e
To accept the next available One Touch
key number press OK.
f
Enter the group name (up to
16 characters) by pressing the buttons
on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
g
When the LCD shows the next available
Group number, press OK.
This Group number and name will
automatically be assigned to the next
available Speed Dial location.
37
Chapter 5
Changing a Group name
a
Press
b
c
d
Press More.
e
f
g
(Phone Book).
Press Change.
Press a or b to display the Group you
want to change.
Press the Group.
Press Name:.
Enter the new name (up to
16 characters) by pressing the buttons
on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
(See Entering Text in appendix C of the
Basic User’s Guide. For example, type
NEW CLIENTS.)
Note
How to change the stored name or
number:
If you want to change a character, press
d or c to position the cursor under the
character you want to change, and then
press
. Re-enter the character.
h
i
38
Press OK.
5
Deleting a Group
a
Press
b
c
d
Press More.
(Phone Book).
Press Delete.
Press a or b to display the Group you
want to delete.
e
f
Press the Group Name.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
Press OK.
Press Yes to confirm.
Deleting a number from a Group
a
Press
b
c
d
Press More.
e
f
g
Press Stop/Exit.
5
(Phone Book).
Press Change.
Press a or b to display the Group you
want to change.
Press the Group.
Press Add/Del.
Press a or b to display the number you
want to delete from the Group.
h
Press the check box of the number you
want to delete to uncheck it.
Press OK to confirm.
i
j
Press OK.
Press Stop/Exit.
5
6
Printing reports
Fax reports
6
g
6
Use the MENU button on the LCD to set up the
Transmission Verification Report and the
Journal Period.
Transmission Verification
Report
 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days
The machine will print the report at
the chosen time and then erase all
jobs from its memory. If the
machine's memory becomes full with
200 jobs before the time you chose
has passed, the machine will print
the Journal early and then erase all
jobs from the memory. If you want an
extra report before it is due to print,
you can print it without erasing the
jobs from the memory.
6
You can use the Transmission Verification
Report as proof that you sent a fax. (For
details about how to set up the type of report
you want, see Transmission Verification
Report in chapter 4 of the Basic User's
Guide.)
Fax Journal (activity report)
You can set the machine to print a journal at
specific intervals (every 50 faxes, 6, 12 or
24 hours, 2 or 7 days). If you set the interval
to Off, you can still print the report by
following the steps in How to print a report
on page 40. The factory setting is
Every 50 Faxes.
a
b
c
d
e
f
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display Fax.
Press Fax.
 Every 50 Faxes
The machine will print the Journal
when the machine has stored
50 jobs.
6
h
Enter the time to start printing in 24-hour
format.
Press OK.
(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
Note
When you set 12h Clock in the
Date&Time setting, enter the time in
12-hour format.
i
If you choose Every 7 Days, the LCD
will ask you to choose the first day for
the 7-day countdown.
j
Press Stop/Exit.
Press a or b to display
Report Setting.
Press Report Setting.
Press d or c to choose an interval.
If you choose Every 50 Faxes, go to
step j.
Press Journal Period.
39
6
Chapter 6
Reports
The following reports are available:
 Transmission
Prints a Transmission Verification Report
for your last transmission.
 Help List
A help list showing how to program your
machine.
 Quick Dial
Lists names and numbers stored in the
One Touch and Speed Dial memory, in
alphabetical or numerical order.
 Fax Journal
Lists information about the last incoming
and outgoing faxes.
(TX: Transmit.) (RX: Receive.)
 User Settings
Lists your settings.
 Network Config
Lists your Network settings.
 WLAN Report
Prints the result of the WLAN connection.
 Caller ID hist.
Lists the available Caller ID information
about the last 30 received faxes and
telephone calls.
40
6
How to print a report
a
b
Press MENU.
Press a or b to display
Print Reports.
c
d
e
Press Print Reports.
f
g
Press Black Start.
Press the report you want.
(Quick Dial Only) Press
Alphabetical Order or
Numerical Order.
Press Stop/Exit.
6
7
Making copies
Copy settings
7
7
Changing copy quality
You can choose from a range of quality. The
factory setting is Normal.
You can change the copy settings for the next
copy.
These settings are temporary. The machine
returns to its default settings 1 minute after
copying unless you have set the Mode Timer
to 30 seconds or less. (See Mode Timer
on page 5.)
 Fast
To change a setting, press COPY and then
press d or c to scroll through the copy
settings. When the setting you want is
displayed, press it and choose your option.
 Normal
Fast copy speed and lowest amount of ink
used. Use to save time printing
documents to be proof-read, large
documents or many copies.
Normal is the recommended mode for
ordinary printouts. This produces good
copy quality with good copy speed.
When you are finished choosing settings,
press Black Start or Color Start.
 Best
• You can save some of the settings that
you use most often by setting them as
default. These settings will stay until you
change them again. (See Setting your
favorites on page 53.)
• The Ink Save Mode,
Thin Paper Copy, Book Copy and
Watermark Copy features are
supported by technology from Reallusion,
Inc.
To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.
7
Use Best mode to copy precise images
such as photographs. This provides the
highest resolution and slowest speed.
Note
Stop copying
7
7
a
Press
b
c
d
e
f
g
Load your document.
(COPY).
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Quality.
Press Quality.
Press Fast, Normal or Best.
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
41
Chapter 7
Enlarging or reducing the
copied image
198% 4"x6"iA4
7
186% 4"x6"iLTR
You can choose an enlargement or reduction
ratio. If you choose Fit to Page, your
machine will adjust the size automatically to
the paper size you set.
130% LTRiLGR
a
93% A4iLTR
b
c
d
Press
(COPY).
104% EXEiLTR
100%
97% LTRiA4
85% LTRiEXE
Load your document.
83% LGLiA4
Enter the number of copies you want.
78% LGLiLTR
Press d or c to display
Enlarge/Reduce.
46% LTRi4"x6"
e
f
Press Enlarge/Reduce.
Custom(25-400%)
g
Do one of the following:
Press 100%, Enlarge, Reduce,
Fit to Page or Custom(25-400%).
 If you chose Enlarge or Reduce,
press the enlargement or reduction
ratio you want.
 If you chose Custom(25-400%),
enter an enlargement or reduction
ratio from 25% to 400%.
Press OK.
 If you chose 100% or Fit to Page,
go to step h.
64% LGRiLTR
Fit to Page
h
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
Note
• Page Layout is not available with
Enlarge/Reduce.
• Page Layout, Book Copy, Sort,
Thin Paper Copy and
Watermark Copy are not available with
Fit to Page.
• Fit to Page does not work properly
when the document on the scanner glass
is skewed more than 3 degrees. Using the
document guidelines on the left and top,
place your document in the upper left
hand corner, with the document face down
on the scanner glass.
• Fit to Page is not available for a Legal
size document.
• When using Ledger or A3 size paper,
1sidei2side and 2sidei2side of
Duplex Copy is not available with
Enlarge/Reduce.
42
Making copies
Making N in 1 copies or a
poster (Page Layout)
The N in 1 copy feature can help you save
paper by letting you copy two or four pages
onto one printed page.
The 1 to 2 feature copies one Ledger or A3
size page onto two Letter or A4 size pages. If
you use this setting, use the scanner glass.
You can also produce a poster. When you
use the poster feature your machine divides
your document into sections, then enlarges
the sections so you can assemble them into a
poster. If you want to print a poster, you must
use the scanner glass and Tray #1.
IMPORTANT
• Make sure the paper size is set to Letter,
Ledger, A4, A3 or Executive.
• If you are producing multiple color copies,
N in 1 copy is not available.
• (P) means Portrait and (L) means
Landscape.
Note
7
• Watermark Copy, Book Copy, Sort,
Thin Paper Copy, Ink Save Mode
and Enlarge/Reduce are not available
with Page Layout.
• Skew Adjustment is not available with
Poster and 1 to 2 copy.
• Duplex Copy is not available with Poster
copy.
• 2sidei2side and 2sidei1side of
Duplex Copy are not available with
1 to 2.
a
Press
b
c
d
e
f
Load your document.
• You can only make one poster copy and
1 to 2 copy at a time.
• Poster copy is not available when using
transparencies or Executive size paper.
7
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Page Layout.
Press Page Layout.
Press d or c to display Off(1in1),
2in1(P), 2in1(L), 4in1(P),
4in1(L), 1 to 2, Poster (2 x 1),
Poster (2 x 2), Poster (3 x 3)
or 2 in 1 (ID) 1.
1
• Poster copy is not available when you
feed paper from Tray #2.
(COPY).
For details about 2 in 1 (ID), see 2 in 1 ID Copy
on page 46.
If you chose 2in1 or
Poster (2 x 2)with Ledger or A3,
go to step g to choose the paper size of
your document.
If you choose another setting, go to
step h.
g
Do one of the following:
 If you chose 2in1(P) or 2in1(L),
press LGRx2 i LGRx1,
LTRx2 i LGRx1, A3x2 i A3x1 or
A4x2 i A3x1.
 If you chose Poster (2 x 2),
press LGRx1 i LGRx4,
LTRx1 i LGRx4, A3x1 i A3x4 or
A4x1 i A3x4.
43
Chapter 7
h
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start to scan the page.
If you placed the document in the ADF
or are making a poster, the machine
scans the pages and starts printing.
If you are using the scanner glass, go
to step i.
i
After the machine scans the page,
press Yes to scan the next page.
j
Place the next page on the scanner
glass. Press Black Start or Color Start
to scan the document.
Repeat steps i and j for each page of
the layout.
k
 2in1(P)
 2in1(L)
 4in1(P)
After all the pages have been scanned,
press No to finish.
Note
If you have chosen photo paper as the
Paper Type for N in 1 copies, the machine
will print the images as if plain paper had
been chosen.
44
If you are copying from the ADF, insert the
document face up in the direction shown
below:
 4in1(L)
Making copies
If you are copying from the scanner glass,
place the document face down in the
direction shown below:
 Poster (2 x 1)
 2in1(P)
 2in1(L)
 Poster (2 x 2)
 4in1(P)
7
 4in1(L)
 1 to 2
 Poster (3 x 3)
45
Chapter 7
2 in 1 ID Copy
7
i
You can copy both sides of your identification
card onto one page, keeping the original card
size. Make sure the paper size is set to Letter
or A4.
Note
You can copy an identification card to the
extent permitted under applicable laws.
See Legal limitations for copying in the
Safety and Legal Booklet.
a
b
Press
(COPY).
Place your identification card face down
at the left corner of the scanner glass.
1
1
c
d
e
f
g
h
46
0.12 in. (3 mm) or greater (top, left)
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Page Layout.
Press Page Layout.
Press d or c to display 2 in 1 (ID).
Press 2 in 1 (ID).
Press Black Start or Color Start.
The machine starts scanning the first
page.
After the machine copies the one side,
press Yes. Turn over the identification
card and press Black Start or
Color Start to scan the another side.
Note
• Watermark Copy, Book Copy, Sort,
Duplex Copy, Thin Paper Copy,
Ink Save Mode and Enlarge/Reduce
are not available with 2 in 1 (ID).
• If you are producing multiple color copies,
2 in 1 (ID) copy is not available.
Sorting copies using the ADF
7
You can sort multiple copies. Pages will be
stacked in the order 321, 321, 321, and so on.
a
Press
b
c
d
e
f
g
Load your document.
(COPY).
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Stack/Sort.
Press Stack/Sort.
Press Sort.
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
Note
Fit to Page, Page Layout and
Book Copy are not available with Sort.
Making copies
Adjusting Density
You can adjust the copy density to make
copies darker or lighter.
a
Press
b
c
d
e
f
Load your document.
g
(COPY).
7
Ink Save Mode
7
Ink Save Mode can help you save some ink.
Your machine detects the edges of the image
and prints the outline of the image.
The amount of ink saved will vary depending
on the document.
Ink Save Mode: Off
7
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display Density.
Press Density.
Press c to make the copy darker or
press d to make the copy lighter.
Press OK.
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
7
Ink Save Mode: On
a
Press
b
c
d
Load your document.
e
f
7
(COPY).
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display
Advanced Settings.
Press Advanced Settings.
Press Ink Save Mode.
47
Chapter 7
g
Skew Adjustment
If you do not want to change any
additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
If your scanned copy is skewed, your
machine can correct the data automatically.
This setting is only available when using the
scanner glass.
Note
• Watermark Copy, Book Copy,
Skew Adjustment,
Thin Paper Copy and Page Layout
are not available with Ink Save Mode.
• Ink Save Mode may make your
printouts look different from your original
document.
Thin Paper Copy
If your document is a duplex copy on thin
paper, choose Thin Paper Copy so the
print on the other side does not bleed
through.
a
Press
b
c
d
Load your document.
e
f
g
(COPY).
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display
Advanced Settings.
Press Advanced Settings.
Press Thin Paper Copy.
Press
b
c
d
Load your document.
(COPY).
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display
Skew Adjustment.
7
e
f
g
Press Skew Adjustment.
Press Auto (or Off).
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
Note
• 1 to 2, Poster, Ink Save Mode,
Thin Paper Copy, Book Copy,
Watermark Copy, 2sidei2side and
2sidei1side of Duplex Copy are not
available with Skew Adjustment.
• You cannot use this setting with Ledger,
A3 or paper that is smaller than
2.52 in.  3.58 in. (64 mm  91 mm).
Press Black Start or Color Start.
• This setting is only available for paper that
is rectangular or square.
Note
• You cannot use this setting with a thick
document, such as a book.
Fit to Page, Page Layout,
Skew Adjustment, Ink Save Mode,
Book Copy and Watermark Copy are
not available with Thin Paper Copy.
48
a
• Skew Adjustment is only available if the
document is skewed by less than 3
degrees.
7
Making copies
Book Copy
7
Book copy corrects dark borders and skew
when copying from the scanner glass. Your
machine can correct the data automatically or
you can make specific corrections.
a
Press
b
c
d
Load your document.
e
f
g
(COPY).
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display
Advanced Settings.
Press Advanced Settings.
Using a template
a
Press
b
c
d
Load your document.
Watermark Copy
You can place a logo or text into your
document as a Watermark. You can select
one of the template watermarks, data from
your media cards or USB Flash memory
drive, or scanned data.
Note
Fit to Page, Page Layout,
Thin Paper Copy,
Skew Adjustment, Ink Save Mode
and Book Copy are not available with
Watermark Copy.
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display
Advanced Settings.
Press Advanced Settings.
i
j
Press OK to confirm to use watermark.
Note
Page Layout, Sort, Duplex Copy,
Skew Adjustment, Ink Save Mode,
Fit to Page, Thin Paper Copy and
Watermark Copy are not available with
Book Copy.
(COPY).
e
f
g
h
Press Book Copy.
If you are finished making corrections,
press Black Start or Color Start.
7
Press Watermark Copy.
Press Edit Template.
Change the settings from the options
displayed on the LCD if required.
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
Using a media card or USB Flash
memory drive
7
7
a
Press
b
c
d
Load your document.
7
(COPY).
Enter the number of copies you want.
Press d or c to display
Advanced Settings.
e
f
g
h
Press Advanced Settings.
i
Press the data you want to use for the
watermark.
Press Watermark Copy.
Press Use Image.
Insert a media card or USB Flash
memory drive. Press Media.
49
Chapter 7
j
k
l
l
m
Change any additional settings from the
options shown on the LCD.
Press OK to confirm to use watermark.
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
Press OK to confirm to use watermark.
If you do not want to change any
additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
Note
You cannot enlarge or reduce the
scanned watermark.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT take out the memory card or
USB Flash memory drive while
PHOTO CAPTURE is blinking to avoid
damaging the card, USB Flash memory
drive, or the data stored on them.
Duplex (2-sided) copying
You can reduce the amount of paper used for
copies by copying on both sides of the paper.
We recommend you load your document in
the ADF for duplex copying.
Using a scanned paper document as
your watermark
a
Press
b
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
50
(COPY).
Press d or c to display
Advanced Settings.
Press Advanced Settings.
Note
7
• You can copy 2-sided documents up to
Legal size using the ADF.
• You can only use plain paper sizes Letter,
Legal, Ledger, A4, A5, A3 or Executive
a
b
Press Duplex on the machine’s panel.
c
d
Press Copy.
Press Watermark Copy.
Press Use Image.
Press Scan. Place the page that you
want to use as a watermark on the
scanner glass.
Press Transparency, and then press
d or c to change the Transparency of
the watermark.
Press OK.
Press OK.
Load your document.
If you want to copy a 2-sided document,
load your document in the ADF.
Do one of the following:
 If you are copying Ledger or A3 size
document, go to step e.
 If you are copying Letter, Legal, A4,
A5 or Executive size document, go to
step h.
Press Black Start or Color Start.
Take out the watermark document you
scanned and load the document you
want to copy.
7
e
f
Press More.
Press
A3/LGR Duplex Copy Setting.
Note
N in 1 copy is not available with
A3/LGR Duplex Copy Setting.
Making copies
g
Press Fit to Page or Keep Scale.
Note
If you choose Fit to Page, your
machine will reduce the document size
automatically to fit the printable area.
If you choose Keep Scale, your
machine will not change the document
size. The top and bottom might be cut off
depending on the document size.
DO NOT touch the printed page until it is
ejected the second time. The machine will
print the first side and eject the paper and
then pull the paper in to print the second side.
Note
h
Press d or c to display the duplex copy
type you want, and press it. (See Duplex
copying type on page 52.)
• If you get a paper jam, press More after
step c. Press Advanced, and then press
one of the jam prevention settings: DX1 or
DX2.
DX1 uses a longer print time for the ink to
dry.
DX2 uses a longer print time and will also
print in lighter colors.
i
Enter the number of copies you want.
• DX1 is not available for Ledger or A3 size
paper.
Note
• 2 in 1 (ID), Poster and Book Copy
are not available with Duplex Copy.
If you want to sort multiple copies, press
d or c to display Stack/Sort, then press
Sort.
j
Press Black Start or Color Start.
If you placed the document in the ADF,
the machine scans the pages and starts
printing.
If you are using the scanner glass, go to
step k.
k
Press Scan and place the next page on
the scanner glass. Press Black Start or
Color Start.
The machine starts printing.
l
If you pressed Sort for multiple copies,
repeat step k for each additional page.
After all the pages have been scanned,
press Complete.
The machine starts printing.
• 1 to 2 and Skew Adjustment are not
available with 2sidei2side and
2sidei1side.
• When using Ledger or A3 size paper,
Enlarge/Reduce is not available with
1sidei2side and 2sidei2side.
• Fit to Page is not available with
1sidei2side and 2sidei2side.
51
7
Chapter 7
Duplex copying type
7
 2 sided i 1 sided
(long edge flip)
 1 sided i 2 sided
Portrait
(long edge flip)
Portrait
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
Landscape
Landscape
11
1
11
2
1
2
2
2
(short edge flip)
(short edge flip)
Portrait
Portrait
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Landscape
Landscape
11
1
11
1
2
2
2
 2 sided i 2 sided
Portrait
1
1
2
2
Landscape
11
11
2
52
2
2
Making copies
Setting your favorites
You can store the copy settings that you use
most often by setting them as a favorite. You
can set up to three favorites.
a
Press
b
Choose the copy option and settings
you want to store.
c
Press d or c to display
Favorite Settings.
d
e
Press Favorite Settings.
(COPY).
g
Retrieving your favorite setting
7
When you are ready to use one of your
favorite set of settings, you can recall it.
a
Press
b
c
d
Press d or c to display Favorite.
(COPY).
Press Favorite.
Press the favorite setting you want to
retrieve.
Rename your favorite setting
7
Press Store.
After you stored your favorite setting, you can
rename it.
Note
a
Press
b
Press d or c to display
Favorite Settings.
c
d
e
Press Favorite Settings.
f
Enter the new name (up to
12 characters). (See Entering Text in
appendix C of the Basic User’s Guide.)
g
Press OK.
Set Watermark Copy to Off or
Template when storing
Favorite Settings.
f
7
Press the location where you want to
store your setting for Favorite:1,
Favorite:2 or Favorite:3.
Do one of the following:
 If you want to rename your setting,
press
to delete characters. Then
enter the new name (up to
12 characters).
Press OK. (See Entering Text in
appendix C of the Basic User’s
Guide.)
(COPY).
7
Press Rename.
Press the favorite setting you want to
rename.
 If you do not want to rename your
setting, press OK.
53
8
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing
photos from a memory card or
USB Flash memory drive
PhotoCapture Center™
operations
Memory cards,
USB Flash memory drive and
folder structures
Please be aware of the following:
8
 (memory card users)
8
Your machine is designed to be compatible
with modern digital camera image files,
memory cards and USB Flash memory
drives; however, please read the points
below to avoid errors:
 The image file extension must be .JPG
(other image file extensions like .JPEG,
.TIF, .GIF and so on will not be
recognized).
 Direct PhotoCapture Center™ printing
must be performed separately from
PhotoCapture Center™ operations using
the PC. (Simultaneous operation is not
available.)
 The machine can read up to 999 files on a
memory card or USB Flash memory drive.
 The DPOF file on the memory cards must
be in a valid DPOF format. (See DPOF
printing on page 58.)
54
 When printing an index or image, the
PhotoCapture Center™ will print all valid
images, even if one or more images have
been corrupted. Corrupted images will not
be printed.
Your machine is designed to read memory
cards that have been formatted by a digital
camera.
When a digital camera formats a memory
card it creates a special folder into which it
copies image data. If you need to modify
the image data stored on a memory card
with your PC, we recommend that you do
not modify the folder structure created by
the digital camera. When saving new or
modified image files to the memory card,
we also recommend you use the same
folder your digital camera uses. If the data
is not saved to the same folder, the
machine may not be able to read the file or
print the image.
 (USB Flash memory drive users)
This machine supports USB Flash
memory drives that have been formatted
by Windows®.
8
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
Movie printing
You can print images from movie files that are
stored on a memory card or USB Flash
memory drive.
A movie file is automatically divided into
9 parts by movie recording times and is
placed in 3 lines, then you can see and print
the scenes that have been automatically
divided.
8
Print Images
8
Print Index (Thumbnails)
8
The PhotoCapture Center™ assigns
numbers for images (such as No.1, No.2,
No.3, and so on).
Note
• You cannot choose a particular movie
scene.
• You can use AVI or MOV movie file
formats (Motion JPEG only). However, if
an AVI file size is 1 GB or more (the
shooting time is about 30 minutes) or a
MOV file size is 2 GB or more (the
shooting time is about 60 minutes), these
files cannot be printed.
The PhotoCapture Center™ does not
recognize any other numbers or file names
that your digital camera or computer has
used to identify the pictures. You can print a
thumbnail page. This will show all the pictures
on the memory card or USB Flash memory
drive.
Note
Only file names that are 8 characters or
less will be printed correctly on the index
sheet.
a
Make sure you have put the memory
card or USB Flash memory drive in the
proper slot.
Press
b
c
(PHOTO CAPTURE).
Press Index Print.
Press Index Sheet and choose
6 Images/Line or 5 Images/Line.
6 Images/Line
5 Images/Line
Print time for 5 Images/Line will be
slower than 6 Images/Line, but the
quality is better.
55
8
Chapter 8
d
Do one of the following:
f
Enter the number of copies you want
either by pressing the number box
directly and entering the number you
want or by pressing + or -.
g
Do one of the following:
 Press Print Setting to change
the paper type or the paper size you
are using.
 If you do not want to change the
paper settings, go to g.
e
f
g
 Press Print Setting to change
the print settings. (See page 59.)
Press Paper Type.
Choose the paper type you are using,
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper,
Brother BP71, Brother BP61 or
Other Glossy.
 If you do not want to change any
settings, press Color Start to print.
Enhance Photos
Press Paper Size.
Choose the paper size you are using,
Letter or A4.
You can edit and add effects to your photos
and view them on the LCD before printing.
Press Color Start to print.
Printing Photos
Note
8
Before you can print an individual image, you
have to know the image number.
a
Make sure you have put the memory
card or USB Flash memory drive in the
proper slot.
Press
b
c
d
e
(PHOTO CAPTURE).
Print the Index. (See Print Index
(Thumbnails) on page 55.)
Press Index Print.
Press Print Photos.
Enter the image number that you want to
print from the Index page (Thumbnails).
After you have chosen the image
numbers, press OK.
Note
• You can enter multiple numbers at one
time by using a comma or a hyphen. For
example, Enter 1,3,6 to print images No.1,
No.3 and No.6. Enter 1-5 to print images
No.1 to No.5.
• You can enter up to 12 characters
(including commas) for the image
numbers you want to print.
56
The Enhance Photo feature is
supported by technology from Reallusion,
Inc.
a
Make sure you have put a memory card
or USB Flash memory drive in the
proper slot.
Press
(PHOTO CAPTURE).
b
Press Enhance Photo.
Note
• Four thumbnails are displayed at a time
with the current page number and total
number of pages listed under the
thumbnails.
• Press d or c repeatedly to scroll through
all photos. Hold down d or c to
fast-forward and fast-rewind through the
thumbnail pages.
• Press
c
d
to start Slide Show.
Press a photo from the thumbnails.
Press Enhance or Trim. You can also
choose both together.
Press OK.
8
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
e
Do one of the following:
(Sepia)
 If you chose Enhance, go to step f.
You can convert the color of your
photo to sepia.
 If you chose Trim, go to step g.
f
(Auto Correct & Remove Red-Eye)
Press the effect you wish to add.
Press OK.
Go to step h.
Note
• You have 10 ways to add effects to your
photo.
The machine decides the suitable
effects for your photo. Also, it will
attempt to remove red-eye from your
photo.
• There are some cases when red-eye may
not be removed.
• When the face is too small in the
image.
(Auto Correct)
• When the face is turning too far up,
down, left or right.
The machine decides the suitable
effect for your photo.
(Enhance Skin)
Best used for adjusting portrait
photographs. It adjusts human skin
color. Press d or c to adjust the level of
contrast.
(Enhance Scenery)
Best used for adjusting landscape
photographs. It highlights green and
blue areas in your photo. Press d or c
to adjust the level of contrast.
(Remove Red-Eye)
The machine will attempt to remove
red-eye from your photo. If red-eye
detection fails, you can press the
Try Again button to re-detect.
(Night Scene)
Night Scene is best used for adjusting
night view photographs to make them
more vivid.
(Fill Light)
Fill Light is best used for adjusting
photographs against the light.
(Whiteboard)
Whiteboard is best used for adjusting
photographs. It detects letters on a
whiteboard in your photo and makes
them more legible.
(Monochrome)
You can convert your photo to
black & white.
• After adding each effect, you can enlarge
the view of the image by pressing
go back to the original size, press
. To
.
• While the image is enlarged, you can
move around the image with up ( ),
down ( ), left ( ) and right ( ).
8
• Press Cancel to return to the list of
effects.
g
Adjust the red frame around your photo.
The part inside of the red frame will be
printed.
 Press + or - to enlarge or reduce the
frame size.
 Press a, b, d or c to move the
position of the frame.
 Press
to rotate the frame.
Press OK when you have finished
adjusting the frame setting.
Press OK to confirm.
Note
If your photo is very small or has irregular
proportions you may not be able to trim
the photo. The LCD will display
Image Too Small. or
Image Too Long.
57
Chapter 8
h
i
Enter the number of copies you want
either by pressing the number box
directly and entering the number you
want or by pressing + or -.
Press OK.
Do one of the following.
 Press Print Setting and change
the print settings. (See page 59.)
 If you do not want to change any
settings, press Color Start to print.
DPOF printing
DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format.
Major digital camera manufacturers (Canon
Inc., Eastman Kodak Company, FUJIFILM
Corporation, Panasonic Corporation and
Sony Corporation) created this standard to
make it easier to print images from a digital
camera.
If your digital camera supports DPOF
printing, you will be able to choose on the
digital camera display the images and
number of copies you want to print.
When a memory card (Memory Stick™,
Memory Stick PRO™, Memory Stick Duo™,
Memory Stick PRO Duo™ SD or SDHC)
containing DPOF information is put into your
machine, you can print the chosen image
easily.
a
Make sure you have put the memory
card in the proper slot.
Press
(PHOTO CAPTURE).
The machine will ask you if you want to
use DPOF settings.
b
c
Press Yes.
Do one of the following:
 Press Print Setting to change
the print settings. (See page 59.)
 If you do not want to change any
settings, press Color Start to print.
Note
An Invalid DPOF File error can occur if the
print order that was created on the camera
has been corrupted. Delete and recreate
the print order using your camera to
correct this problem. For instructions on
how to delete or recreate the print order,
refer to your camera manufacturer's
support Web site or accompanying
documentation.
58
8
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
PhotoCapture Center™
print settings
Paper options
8
You can change the print settings for the next
printing.
Paper Type
a
b
c
d
These settings are temporary, and the
machine returns to its default settings
3 minutes after printing, unless you have set
the Mode Timer to 2 minutes or less. (See
Mode Timer on page 5.)
Note
You can save the print settings you use
most often by setting them as the default.
(See Setting your changes as the new
default on page 62.)
8
e
8
Press Print Setting.
Press a or b to display Paper Type.
Press Paper Type.
Press the paper type you are using,
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper,
Brother BP71, Brother BP61 or
Other Glossy.
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press
.
Press Color Start to print.
Paper and print size
Print Quality
a
b
Press Print Setting.
Press a or b to display
Print Quality.
c
d
Press Print Quality.
e
If you do not want to change additional
a
b
c
d
8
8
Press Print Setting.
8
Press a or b to display Paper Size.
Press Paper Size.
Press the paper size you are using,
4"x 6", 5"x 7", Letter, Ledger, A4
or A3.
Do one of the following:
 If you chose Letter or A4, go to
step e.
 If you chose another size of paper,
go to step f.
Press Normal or Photo.
settings, press
.
Press Color Start to print.
59
Chapter 8
e
Contrast
Press the Print Size.
You can choose the contrast setting.
Increasing the contrast will make an image
look sharper and more vivid.
Example: Printed position for Letter paper
1
2
3"x 4"
4
3
3.5"x 5"
5
5"x 7"
4"x 6"
a
b
c
d
Press Print Setting.
e
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press
.
Press Color Start to print.
6
6"x 8"
Max. Size
Press a or b to display Contrast.
Press Contrast.
Press c to increase the contrast or press
d to decrease the contrast.
Press OK.
Color Enhancement (True2Life™)
f
You can turn on the color enhancement
(True2Life™) feature to print more vivid
images. Printing time will be slower.
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press
.
Press Color Start to print.
Adjusting Brightness,
Contrast and Color
Brightness
a
b
c
d
Press Print Setting.
e
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press
.
Press Color Start to print.
60
8
a
b
c
d
Press Print Setting.
Press a or b to display True2Life.
Press True2Life.
Do one of the following:
 If you want to customize the
White Balance, Sharpness or
Color Density, press On, and
then go to step e.
8
 If you do not want to customize,
press Off.
Press a or b to display Brightness.
Press Brightness.
Press d to make a darker print or press
c to make a lighter print.
Press OK.
8
Go to step h.
e
Press White Balance, Sharpness or
Color Density.
f
Press d or c to adjust the degree of the
setting.
Press OK.
8
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
g
Do one of the following:
 If you want to customize another
color enhancement, repeat steps e
to f.
 If you want to change other settings,
press
to display the print
setting menu and press the setting
you want to change. (See page 59.)
h
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press
.
Press Color Start to print.
Note
• White Balance
This setting adjusts the hue of the white
areas of an image. Lighting, camera
settings and other influences will affect the
appearance of white. The white areas of a
picture may be slightly pink, yellow or
some other color. By using this setting,
you can correct that effect and bring the
white areas back to pure white.
Cropping
8
If your photo is too long or wide to fit the
available space on your chosen layout, part
of the image will automatically be cropped.
The factory setting is On. If you want to print
the whole image, turn this setting to Off.
When you set Cropping to Off, also set
Borderless to Off. (See Borderless
printing on page 62.)
a
b
c
d
Press Print Setting.
e
If you do not want to change additional
Press a or b to display Cropping.
Press Cropping.
Press Off (or On).
settings, press
.
Press Color Start to print.
Cropping: On
8
8
• Sharpness
This setting enhances the detail of an
image, similar to adjusting the fine focus
on a camera. If the image is not in true
focus and you cannot see the fine details
of the picture, then adjust the sharpness.
Cropping: Off
8
• Color Density
This setting adjusts the total amount of
color in the image. You can increase or
decrease the amount of color in an image
to improve a washed out or weak picture.
61
Chapter 8
Borderless printing
8
This feature expands the printable area to the
edges of the paper. Printing time will be
slightly slower.
a
b
c
d
Press Print Setting.
e
If you do not want to change additional
Setting your changes as the
new default
You can save the print settings you use most
often by setting them as the default settings.
These settings will stay until you change
them again.
Press a or b to display Borderless.
a
Press your new setting.
Repeat this step for each setting you
want to change.
b
After changing the last setting, press
a or b to choose Set New Default.
c
d
e
Press Set New Default.
Press Borderless.
Press Off (or On).
settings, press
.
Press Color Start to print.
Print Date
8
Press Yes to confirm.
Press Stop/Exit.
You can print the date if it is already in the
data on your photo. The date will be printed
on the lower right corner. If the data doesn’t
have the date information, you cannot use
this function.
Restoring all settings to the
factory settings
a
b
c
d
Press Print Setting.
Print Quality, Paper Type,
Paper Size, Brightness, Contrast,
True2Life, Cropping, Borderless and
Print Date, that you have changed, to the
factory settings.
e
If you do not want to change additional
Press a or b to display Print Date.
Press Print Date.
Press On (or Off).
settings, press
.
Press Color Start to print.
Note
The DPOF setting on your camera must
be turned off to use the Print Date
feature.
62
8
You can restore the PhotoCapture settings
a
b
c
d
e
Press Print Setting.
Press a or b to display
Factory Reset.
Press Factory Reset.
Press Yes to confirm.
Press Stop/Exit.
8
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
Scan to a memory card
or USB Flash memory
drive
Auto Crop
8
To scan a Legal, Ledger, A3 or A4 size
document, you need to change the
Glass Scan Size setting. The default
setting is Letter.
You can scan multiple documents placed on
the scanner glass. An individual document
can be previewed on the LCD before you
save it. When you choose Auto Crop, the
machine will scan each document and create
separate files. For example, if you place three
documents on the scanner glass, the
machine will scan and create three separate
files. If you want to create a three-page file,
choose PDF or TIFF for File Type.
a
Press
(If you choose JPEG, each document is
created as three separate files.)
b
c
Press to Media.
Glass Scan Size
8
1
Press d or c to display
Glass Scan Size.
Press Glass Scan Size.
1
Press Letter, Legal, Ledger, A3 or
A4.
3
2
Note
• You can save the setting you use most
often by setting it as the default. (See
Setting your changes as the new default
on page 62.)
• This setting is only available for scanning
documents from the scanner glass.
3 2 1
d
e
(SCAN).
8
8
2
1
0.4 in. (10 mm) or greater (top, left, right)
2
0.8 in. (20 mm) or greater (bottom)
Note
• Auto Crop works properly for all
Glass Scan Size settings.
• Auto Crop is supported by technology
from Reallusion, Inc.
a
Make sure you have put the memory
card or USB Flash memory drive in the
proper slot.
b
Load your document.
c
Press
(SCAN).
63
Chapter 8
d
e
f
g
h
Press to Media.
Press d or c to display Auto Crop.
Press Auto Crop.
Press On.
If you do not want to change additional
settings, press Black Start or
Color Start to start scanning.
i
The number of the scanned documents
appears on the LCD.
Press OK.
j
Press d or c to preview each document
data.
k
Press Save All to save the data.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT take out the memory card or
USB Flash memory drive while
PHOTO CAPTURE is blinking to avoid
damaging the card, USB Flash memory
drive or the data stored on them.
How to set a new default
You can save the Scan to Media settings
(Quality, File Type,
Glass Scan Size and Auto Crop) you
use most often by setting them as the default
settings. These settings will stay until you
change them again.
a
Press
• Auto Crop is available for paper with
right angles of 90 degrees at all four
corners. If one of the angles is not square,
Auto Crop cannot detect the document.
b
c
Press to Media.
• If your document is too long or wide, this
setting does not work properly.
d
e
f
Note
• You must place the documents away from
the edges of the scanner glass as shown
in the illustration.
• You must place the documents at least
0.4 in. (10 mm) apart from each other.
• Auto Crop adjusts the skew of the
document on the scanner glass, but if your
document is skewed more than
10 degrees, this setting will not work.
• The ADF must be empty to use the
Auto Crop.
• The Auto Crop feature is available for up
to a maximum of 16 documents
depending on the size of your documents.
64
(SCAN).
Press d or c to display
Set New Default.
Press Set New Default.
Press Yes to confirm.
Press Stop/Exit.
8
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
How to reset to the factory
settings
8
You can restore all the Scan to Media settings
(Quality, File Type,
Glass Scan Size and Auto Crop), that
you have changed, to the factory settings.
a
Press
b
c
Press to Media.
d
e
f
(SCAN).
Press d or c to choose
Factory Reset.
Press Factory Reset.
Press Yes to confirm.
Press Stop/Exit.
8
65
9
Printing photos from a camera
Printing photos
directly from a
PictBridge camera
PictBridge requirements
If your camera is using the USB Mass
Storage standard, you can also print photos
from a digital camera without PictBridge.
(See Printing photos directly from a digital
camera (without PictBridge) on page 69.)
66
9
To avoid errors, remember the following
points:
9
 The machine and the digital camera must
be connected using a suitable USB cable.
 The image file extension must be .JPG
(other image file extensions like .JPEG,
.TIF, .GIF and so on will not be
recognized).
Your Brother machine supports the
PictBridge standard, allowing you to connect
to and print photos directly from any
PictBridge compatible digital camera.
9
 PhotoCapture Center™ operations are
not available when using the PictBridge
feature.
Printing photos from a camera
Setting your digital camera
9
Settings
Options
Make sure your camera is in PictBridge
mode. The following PictBridge settings may
be available from the LCD of your PictBridge
compatible camera.
Paper Size
4"  6"
Paper Type
Glossy Paper
Layout
Borderless: On
Depending on your camera some of these
settings may not be available.
Print Quality
Fine
Color Enhancement
Off
Print Date
Off
Camera Menu
Selections
Options
Paper Size
Ledger, Letter, A3, A4,
4"  6",
Printer Settings
(Default setting) 2
Paper Type
Plain Paper, Glossy Paper,
Inkjet Paper, Printer Settings
(Default setting) 2
Layout
Borderless: On,
Borderless: Off,
Printer Settings
(Default setting) 2
DPOF setting 1
-
Print Quality
Normal, Fine,
Printer Settings
 When your camera does not have any
menu selections, these settings are also
used.
 The name and availability of each setting
depends on the specification of your
camera.
Please refer to the documentation supplied
with your camera for more detailed
information on changing PictBridge settings.
9
(Default setting) 2
Color
Enhancement
On, Off,
Printer Settings
(Default setting) 2
Print Date
On, Off,
Printer Settings
(Default setting) 2
1
See DPOF printing on page 68 for more details.
2
If your camera is set to use the Printer Settings
(Default setting), the machine will print your photo
using the following settings.
67
Chapter 9
Printing Images
Note
Remove any memory cards or USB Flash
memory drive from the machine before
connecting a digital camera.
a
Make sure that your camera is turned
off. Connect your camera to the USB
direct interface (1) on the machine using
the USB cable.
9
DPOF printing
DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format.
Major digital camera manufacturers (Canon
Inc., Eastman Kodak Company, FUJIFILM
Corporation, Panasonic Corporation and
Sony Corporation) created this standard to
make it easier to print images from a digital
camera.
If your digital camera supports DPOF
printing, you will be able to choose on the
digital camera display the images and
number of copies you want to print.
Note
An Invalid DPOF File error can occur if the
print order that was created on the camera
has been corrupted. Delete and recreate
the print order using your camera to
correct this problem. For instructions on
how to delete or recreate the print order,
refer to your camera manufacturer's
support Web site or accompanying
documentation.
1
1
USB direct interface
b
Turn on the camera.
When the machine has recognized the
camera, the LCD shows
Camera Connected.
c
Choose the photo you want to print
following the instructions from your
camera.
When the machine starts printing a
photo, the LCD will show Printing.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to your machine, do
not connect any device other than a digital
camera or USB Flash memory drive to the
USB direct interface.
68
9
Printing photos from a camera
Printing photos
directly from a digital
camera
(without PictBridge)
If your camera is using the USB Mass
Storage standard, you can connect your
camera in storage mode. This enables you to
print photos from your camera.
Printing Images
9
Note
9
Remove any memory cards or USB Flash
memory drive from the machine before
connecting a digital camera.
a
(If you would like to print photos in PictBridge
mode, see Printing photos directly from a
PictBridge camera on page 66.)
Make sure that your camera is turned
off. Connect your camera to the USB
direct interface (1) on the machine using
the USB cable.
Note
The name, availability and operation differ
among digital cameras. Please refer to the
documentation supplied with your camera
for detailed information, such as how to
switch from PictBridge mode to USB mass
storage mode.
1
9
1
b
c
USB direct interface
Turn on the camera.
Follow the steps in Print Images
on page 55.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to your machine, do
not connect any device other than a digital
camera or USB Flash memory drive to the
USB direct interface.
69
A
Routine maintenance
Cleaning and checking
the machine
Cleaning the outside of the
machine
Clean the Touchscreen as follows:
IMPORTANT
• Turn off the power switch when you clean
the Touchscreen.
• DO NOT use any type of liquid cleaners
(including ethanol).
Clean the outside of the machine as
follows:
A
IMPORTANT
A
• Use neutral detergents. Cleaning with
volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine
will damage the outside surface of the
machine.
• DO NOT use cleaning materials that
contain ammonia.
• DO NOT use isopropyl alcohol to remove
dirt from the control panel. It may crack the
panel.
a
a
Clean the Touchscreen with a dry, soft
lint-free cloth.
A
Pull the paper trays (1) completely out of
the machine.
1
1
70
Routine maintenance
b
Wipe the outside of the machine with a
dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove dust.
Cleaning the machine’s
printer platen
A
CAUTION
Be sure to unplug the machine from the AC
power outlet before cleaning the printer
platen to avoid an electrical shock.
c
Lift the output paper tray cover and
remove anything that is stuck inside the
paper tray.
d
Wipe the inside and outside of the paper
tray with a dry, soft lint-free cloth to
remove dust.
e
Close the output paper tray cover and
put the output paper tray firmly back in
the machine.
a
Using both hands, use the finger holds
on each side of the machine to lift the
scanner cover into the open position.
b
Clean the machine’s printer platen (1)
and the area around it, wiping off any
scattered ink with a dry, soft lint-free
cloth.
A
2
1
3
IMPORTANT
DO NOT touch the plate (2) and lever (3).
Doing this may cause damage to the
machine.
71
c
Cleaning the paper feed
rollers
A
If the paper feed rollers are stained with ink, it
may cause paper feed problems.
a
Unplug the machine from the AC power
outlet. Pull the paper tray completely out
of the machine.
Lift the Jam Clear flap (2), and then
clean the back side of the Paper Feed
Rollers (1) with a soft lint-free cloth
moistened with water.
After cleaning, wipe the rollers with a
dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove all
moisture.
2
1
Note
If the paper support flap is open, close it,
and then close the paper support.
b
Clean the front side of the Paper Feed
Rollers (1) with a soft lint-free cloth
moistened with water, using a
side-to-side motion.
After cleaning, wipe the rollers with a
dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove all
moisture.
1
72
d
Put the paper tray firmly back in the
machine.
e
Re-connect the power cord.
Note
Do not use the machine again until the
rollers are dry. Using the machine before
the rollers are dry may cause paper feed
problems.
Routine maintenance
Cleaning the paper pick-up
rollers
a
Unplug the machine from the AC power
outlet.
b
Pull the paper tray completely out of the
machine.
d
A
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers (1) with
a soft lint-free cloth moistened with
water.
Slowly turn the rollers so that the whole
surface is cleaned.
After cleaning, wipe the rollers with a
dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove all
moisture.
Note
If the machine starts multiple-feeding the
last few sheets of paper in the tray, clean
the Base Pad (1) with a soft lint-free cloth
moistened with water.
1
After cleaning, wipe the pad with a dry,
soft lint-free cloth to remove all moisture.
1
e
c
Clean the Back Paper Feed Rollers (1)
with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with
water.
Slowly turn the rollers so that the whole
surface is cleaned.
After cleaning, wipe the rollers with a
dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove all
moisture.
Open the Jam Clear Cover (1) at the
back of the machine.
1
1
73
A
c
d
Note
Do not touch the metal shaft.
f
Close the Jam Clear Cover.
Make sure the cover is closed
completely.
g
Put the paper tray firmly back in the
machine.
h
Re-connect the power cord.
Cleaning the paper pick-up
rollers for paper tray #2
a
Unplug the machine from the AC power
outlet. Pull tray #2 completely out of the
machine.
Note
If the paper support flap is open, close it,
and then close the paper support.
b
Clean the paper pick-up rollers for
tray #2 (1) with a soft lint-free cloth
moistened with water.
Slowly turn the rollers so that the whole
surface is cleaned.
After cleaning, wipe the rollers with a
dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove all
moisture.
1
74
Put tray #2 firmly back in the machine.
Re-connect the power cord.
Checking the ink volume
Although an ink volume icon appears on the
LCD, you can use the ink menu to see a large
graph showing the ink that is left in each
cartridge.
a
Press
b
Press Ink Volume.
The LCD shows the ink volume.
c
Press Stop/Exit.
A
.
Note
You can check the ink volume from your
computer. (See Printing for Windows® or
Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the
Software User’s Guide.)
A
Routine maintenance
Packing and shipping
the machine
e
Gently close the scanner cover using
the finger holds on each side.
A
When you transport the machine, use the
packing materials that came with your
machine. If you do not pack the machine
properly, any damage that may occur in
transit may not be covered by your warranty.
IMPORTANT
It is important to allow the machine to
“park” the print head after a print job.
Listen carefully to the machine before
unplugging it to make sure that all
mechanical noise has stopped. Not
allowing the machine to finish this parking
process may lead to print problems and
possible damage to the print head.
a
Unplug the machine from the telephone
wall jack and take the telephone line
cord out of the machine.
b
Unplug the machine from the AC power
outlet.
c
Using both hands, use the finger holds
on each side of the machine to lift the
scanner cover into the open position.
Then unplug the interface cable from the
machine, if it is connected.
d
Remove the orange protective part from
the inside right corner of the machine.
WARNING
Be careful not to trap your fingers under the
scanner cover.
Always use the finger holds provided on
each side of the scanner cover when
opening and closing it.
f
g
Open the ink cartridge cover.
h
Install the orange protective part and
then close the ink cartridge cover.
Press the ink release levers to release
the ink cartridges and then take out the
ink cartridges. (See Replacing the ink
cartridges in appendix A of the Basic
User’s Guide.)
75
A
j
IMPORTANT
• Make sure the plastic tab on the right side
of the orange protective part (1) clicks
securely into place (2).
Pack the machine and the printed
materials in the original carton with the
original packing material as shown
below. Do not pack the used ink
cartridges in the carton.
Note
If you are returning your machine to
Brother as part of the Exchange Service,
pack only the machine. Keep all separate
parts and printed materials to use with
your “Exchange” machine.
9
2
• If you are not able to find the orange
protective part, DO NOT remove the ink
cartridges before shipping. It is essential
that the machine be shipped with either
the orange protective part or the ink
cartridges in position. Shipping without
them will cause damage to your machine
and may void your warranty.
8
3
C
10
6
B
Wrap the machine in the bag.
B
i
D
D
1
4
2
5
76
A
A
k
C
7
A
1
Close the carton and tape it shut.
B
Glossary
B
This is a comprehensive list of features and terms that appear in Brother manuals. Availability of
these features depends on the model you purchased.
ADF (automatic document feeder)
The document can be placed in the ADF
and scanned one page at a time
automatically.
Auto Reduction
Reduces the size of incoming faxes.
Automatic Redial
A feature that enables your machine to
redial the last fax number after five
minutes if the fax did not go through
because the line was busy.
Backup Print
Your machine prints a copy of every fax
that is received and stored in memory.
This is a safety feature so you will not lose
messages during a power failure.
Batch Transmission
(Black & white faxes only) As a cost
saving feature, all delayed faxes to the
same fax number can be sent as one
transmission.
Beeper Volume
Volume setting for the beep when you
press a key or make an error.
Brightness
Changing the Brightness makes the whole
image lighter or darker.
Broadcasting
The ability to send the same fax message
to more than one location.
Caller ID
A service purchased from the telephone
company that lets you see the number (or
name) of the party calling you.
CNG tones
The special tones (beeps) sent by fax
machines during automatic transmission
to tell the receiving machine that a fax
machine is calling.
Coding method
Method of coding the information
contained in the document. All fax
machines must use a minimum standard
of Modified Huffman (MH). Your machine
is capable of greater compression
methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified
Modified Read (MMR) and JPEG, if the
receiving machine has the same
capability.
Communication error (Comm. Error)
An error during fax sending or receiving,
usually caused by line noise or static.
Compatibility group
The ability of one fax unit to communicate
with another. Compatibility is assured
between ITU-T Groups.
Contrast
Setting to compensate for dark or light
documents, by making faxes or copies of
dark documents lighter and light
documents darker.
Delayed Fax
Sends your fax at a specified time later.
Density
Changing the Density makes the whole
image lighter or darker.
Distinctive Ring
A subscriber service purchased from the
telephone company that gives you
another telephone number on an existing
telephone line. The Brother machine uses
the new number to simulate a dedicated
fax line.
77
B
Dual Access
Your machine can scan outgoing faxes or
scheduled jobs into memory at the same
time it is sending a fax from memory or
receiving or printing an incoming fax.
Easy Receive
Enables your machine to respond to CNG
tones if you interrupt a fax call by
answering it.
ECM (Error Correction Mode)
Detects errors during fax transmission
and resends the pages of the fax that had
an error.
Extension telephone
A telephone using the same line as your
fax but plugged into a separate wall jack.
External telephone
A telephone that is plugged into the
EXT. jack of your machine.
F/T Ring Time
The length of time that the Brother
machine rings (when the Receive Mode
setting is Fax/Tel) to notify you to pick up
a voice call that it answered.
Fax Forwarding
Sends a fax received into the memory to
another pre-programmed fax number.
Fax Journal
Lists information about the last 200
incoming and outgoing faxes. TX means
Transmit. RX means Receive.
Fax Preview
If you turn on Fax Preview you will be able
to view incoming faxes on the LCD by
pressing the Fax Preview key on the
control panel or the Fax Preview button
on the Touchscreen.
Fax Receive Code
Press this code (l 5 1) when you answer
a fax call on an extension or external
telephone.
Fax Storage
You can store received faxes in memory.
78
Fax tones
The signals sent by sending and receiving
fax machines while communicating
information.
Fax/Tel
You can receive faxes and telephone
calls. Do not use this mode if you are
using a telephone answering device
(TAD).
Fine resolution
Resolution is 203  196 dpi. It is used for
small print and graphs.
Gray Scale
The shades of gray available for copying,
scanning and faxing photographs.
Group number
A combination of One Touch and
Speed Dial numbers that are stored on a
One Touch key or in a Speed Dial location
for Broadcasting.
Help list
A printout of the complete Menu table that
you can use to program your machine
when you do not have the Basic User's
Guide with you.
Innobella™
Innobella™ is a range of genuine
consumables offered by Brother. For best
quality results Brother recommends
Innobella™ Ink and Paper.
Journal Period
The pre-programmed time period
between automatically printed Fax
Journal Reports. You can print the Fax
Journal on demand without interrupting
the cycle.
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
The LCD screen on the machine that
shows interactive messages during OnScreen Programming and shows the date
and time when the machine is idle.
Glossary
Manual fax
You can lift the handset of the external
telephone or you can press Hook to hear
the receiving fax machine answer before
you press Black Start or Color Start to
begin sending.
Memory Receive
Receives faxes into the machine's
memory when the machine is out of paper.
Menu mode
Programming mode for changing your
machine's settings.
OCR (optical character recognition)
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™12SE with OCR
or Presto! PageManager software
application converts an image of text to
text you can edit.
One Touch
Keys on the machine’s control panel
where you can store numbers for easy
dialing. You can store a second number
on each key if you hold down Shift as you
press the One Touch key.
Overseas Mode
Makes temporary changes to the fax
tones to accommodate noise and static on
overseas telephone lines.
Paging
This feature enables your machine to call
your pager when a fax is received into its
memory. The machine will also page for
voice messages.
Pause
Allows you to place a 3.5 second delay in
the dialing sequence while you are dialing
using the dial pad or while you are storing
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers.
Press the Redial/Pause key on the
control panel or the Pause button on the
Touchscreen as many times as needed
for longer pauses.
PhotoCapture Center™
Allows you to print digital photos from your
digital camera at high resolution for photo
quality printing.
Photo resolution (B&W only)
A resolution setting that uses varying
shades of gray for the best representation
of photographs.
PictBridge
Allows you to print photos directly from
your digital camera at high resolution for
photo quality printing.
Polling
The process of a fax machine calling
another fax machine to retrieve waiting fax
messages.
Pulse (Canada only)
A form of rotary dialing on a telephone
line.
Quick Dial List
A listing of names and numbers stored in
One Touch and Speed Dial memory, in
numerical order.
Real Time Transmission
When memory is full, you can send faxes
in real time.
Remaining jobs
You can check which jobs are waiting in
memory and cancel jobs individually.
Remote Access Code
Your own four-digit code (--- ) that allows
you to call and access your machine from
a remote location.
Remote Retrieval Access
The ability to access your machine
remotely from a touch-tone telephone.
Resolution
The number of vertical and horizontal lines
per inch. See: Standard, Fine, Super Fine
and Photo.
Ring Delay
The number of rings before the machine
answers in Fax Only and Fax/Tel
modes.
Ring Volume
Volume setting for the machine's ring.
79
B
Scanning
The process of sending an electronic
image of a paper document into your
computer.
Transmission
The process of sending faxes over the
phone lines from your machine to the
receiving fax machine.
Scan to Media
You can scan a black & white or color
document into a memory card or USB
Flash memory drive. Black & white images
can be in TIFF or PDF file format and color
images can be in PDF or JPEG file format.
Transmission Verification Report
A listing for the last fax sent, that shows its
date, time and number.
Search
An electronic, numerical or alphabetical
listing of stored One Touch, Speed Dial
and Group numbers.
Speed Dial
A pre-programmed number for easy
dialing.
Standard resolution
203  97 dpi. It is used for regular size text
and quickest transmission.
Station ID
The stored information that appears on
the top of faxed pages. It includes the
sender's name and fax number.
Super Fine resolution (B&W)
392  203 dpi. Best for very small print
and line art.
TAD (telephone answering device)
You can connect an external telephone
answering device or answering machine
to the EXT. jack of your machine.
Telephone Answer Code
(For Fax/Tel mode only)
When the machine answers a voice call, it
pseudo/double-rings. You can pick up at
an extension telephone by pressing this
code (# 5 1).
Temporary settings
You can choose certain options for each
fax transmission and copy without
changing the default settings.
Tone
A form of dialing on the telephone line
used for touch-tone telephones.
80
True2Life™
Adjusts the color in the image for better
print quality by improving sharpness,
white balance and color density.
User Settings
A printed report that shows the current
settings of the machine.
WLAN Report
A printed report that shows the result of
the WLAN Connection.
C
Index
Numerics
2 in 1 ID Copy ..........................................46
A
Access codes, storing and dialing ............33
Apple Macintosh
See Software User's Guide.
B
Broadcasting ............................................13
setting up Groups for ............................37
C
Caller ID ...................................................29
Caller ID history ....................................32
Add to One Touch Dial ......................32
Add to Speed Dial ..............................32
Delete ................................................32
Send a fax ..........................................32
Caller ID History report .........................40
Setting up your area code .....................30
Canceling
Fax Forwarding .............................. 22, 24
Fax Storage ..........................................22
jobs awaiting redial ...............................16
Paging ............................................ 22, 24
Cleaning
paper feed roller ....................................72
paper pick-up roller ...............................73
printer platen .........................................71
Connecting
two-line external TAD or telephone ......31
ControlCenter
See Software User's Guide.
Copy
2 in 1 ID ................................................ 46
book ..................................................... 49
density .................................................. 47
duplex ................................................... 50
enlarge/reduce ..................................... 42
Favorite settings ................................... 53
ink save mode ...................................... 47
page layout (N in 1) .............................. 43
poster ................................................... 43
quality ................................................... 41
skew adjustment .................................. 48
sort (ADF only) ..................................... 46
thin paper ............................................. 48
using ADF ............................................ 46
Watermark ............................................ 49
using a media card ............................ 49
using a paper document .................... 50
using a template ................................ 49
using a USB Flash memory drive ...... 49
D
Dialing
access codes and credit card
numbers ............................................... 33
Caller ID history .................................... 32
dial prefix ................................................ 4
Groups (Broadcasting) ......................... 13
Outgoing Call ....................................... 32
Direct printing
from a non-PictBridge camera ............. 69
from a PictBridge camera ..................... 66
Dual Access ............................................ 13
Duplex (2-sided)
copy ...................................................... 50
fax ........................................................ 12
81
C
F
I
Fax codes
changing ...............................................23
Remote Access Code ...........................23
Fax Forwarding
changing remotely .......................... 24, 25
programming a number .........................18
Fax Storage .............................................20
printing from memory ............................20
turning off ..............................................22
turning on ..............................................20
Fax, from PC
See Software User's Guide.
Fax, stand-alone
receiving
at end of conversation ........................26
Fax Forwarding ..................................24
into PC ...............................................21
into the memory .................................18
out of paper reception ........................18
Paging ................................................19
printing from memory .........................20
reducing to fit on paper ......................26
retrieving from a remote site ....... 24, 25
sending .................................................10
at end of conversation ........................13
Broadcasting ......................................13
canceling from memory ......................16
contrast ..............................................10
delayed batch transmission ...............16
delayed fax .........................................15
duplex (2-sided) .................................12
from memory (Dual Access) ..............13
manual ...............................................12
overseas ............................................15
Real Time Transmission ....................15
Resolution ..........................................11
return to factory setting ......................11
set new default ...................................11
Function Lock .............................................6
ID Copy ................................................... 46
Ink cartridges
checking ink volume ............................. 74
G
Groups for Broadcasting ..........................37
82
J
Jacks
Convert to RJ11 jack triplex adapter .... 31
EXT
TAD ................................................... 31
L
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
Brightness .............................................. 4
Dim Timer ............................................... 4
Help List ............................................... 40
M
Macintosh
See Software User's Guide.
Manual
transmission ......................................... 12
Memory Storage ........................................ 1
Mode, entering
Timer ...................................................... 5
Movie printing .......................................... 55
N
Network
Printing
See Network User's Guide.
Scanning
See Software User's Guide.
O
One Touch
setting up from Caller ID history ........... 34
setting up from outgoing calls ............... 34
Outgoing Call
Add to One Touch Dial ......................... 32
Add to Speed Dial ................................ 32
Delete ................................................... 32
Send a fax ............................................ 32
P
Packing and shipping the machine ..........75
Paging ......................................................19
PaperPort™12SE with OCR
See Software User's Guide. See also Help
in the PaperPort™12SE application.
PhotoCapture Center™
Adding Effect ........................................56
DPOF printing .......................................58
from PC
See Software User's Guide.
Photo Effects
Auto Correct .......................................56
Enhance Scenery ..............................56
Enhance Skin .....................................56
Fill Light .............................................56
Monochrome ......................................56
Night Scene .......................................56
Remove Red-Eye ..............................56
Sepia ..................................................56
Trim ....................................................56
Whiteboard ........................................56
Print settings
Borderless ..........................................62
Brightness ..........................................60
Contrast .............................................60
Cropping ............................................61
Paper type & size ...............................59
Print Date ...........................................62
Quality ................................................59
Return to factory setting .....................62
Set new default ..................................62
Printing
index ..................................................55
photos ................................................56
Scan to Media
auto crop ............................................63
memory card ......................................63
USB Flash memory ............................63
PictBridge
DPOF Printing .......................................68
Power failure ..............................................1
Presto! PageManager
See Software User's Guide. See also Help
in the Presto! PageManager application.
Print
fax from memory ...................................20
report ....................................................40
Printing
See Software User's Guide.
Q
Quick Dial
Access codes and credit card
numbers ............................................... 33
Broadcasting ........................................ 13
deleting Groups ................................. 38
using Groups ..................................... 13
Group dial
changing ............................................ 38
setting up Groups for
Broadcasting ..................................... 37
One Touch
setting up from Caller ID history ........ 34
setting up from outgoing calls ........... 34
Speed Dial
setting up from Caller ID history ........ 36
setting up from outgoing calls ........... 35
R
Reducing
copies ................................................... 42
incoming faxes ..................................... 26
Remote Retrieval ..................................... 23
commands ............................................ 24
getting your faxes ................................. 25
remote access code ............................. 23
Remote Setup
See Software User's Guide.
Reports .................................................... 39
Caller ID History Report ....................... 40
Fax Journal .......................................... 40
Journal Period ................................... 39
Help List ............................................... 40
how to print ........................................... 40
Network Configuration .......................... 40
Quick Dial List ...................................... 40
Transmission Verification ............... 39, 40
User Settings ........................................ 40
WLAN Report ....................................... 40
Resolution
setting for next fax ................................ 11
Restricted users ........................................ 8
83
C
S
Scanning
See Software User's Guide.
Security
Secure function lock
administrator password ........................7
restricted users ....................................8
Shipping the machine ..............................75
Sleep Mode ................................................3
Speed Dial
setting up from Caller ID history ............36
setting up from outgoing calls ...............35
T
TAD (telephone answering device),
external ....................................................31
with two-line jack ...................................31
Telephone line
roll over lines .........................................30
two-line telephone system ....................30
Troubleshooting
checking ink volume ..............................74
Two-line telephone system ......................30
V
Volume, setting
beeper .....................................................2
ring ..........................................................1
speaker ...................................................2
W
Warranties (Printed / In the box)
Windows®
See Software User's Guide.
Wireless Network
See Quick Setup Guide and Network
User's Guide.
84
Brother International Corporation
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.
1 rue Hôtel de Ville,
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, Canada H9B 3H6
Visit us on the World Wide Web
http://www.brother.com/
This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or their
dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.